gdb/testsuite/
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
794e51c0 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
ac145307 25@set C6X
49fa1e15 26@set H8300
0285c67d 27@set HPPA
0285c67d 28@set I960
0285c67d 29@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 30@set M68K
3c3bdf30 31@set MMIX
2469cfa2 32@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
33@set POWERPC
34@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
35@set Renesas
36@set SPU
37@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 38@set WIN32
e0001a05 39@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
40@end ifset
41@c man end
42
9160ea82
AM
43@ifnottex
44@dircategory Software development
45@direntry
252b5132 46* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
47@end direntry
48@end ifnottex
252b5132 49
0e9517a9 50@copying
e49e529d
JM
51This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
52@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
53@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
54@end ifset
55version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 56
9fbcbd81 57Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 582001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
95Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
961999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
97Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 98
0285c67d 99Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 100under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
101or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
102with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
103Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 104section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 105@c man end
252b5132 106
252b5132
RH
107@end titlepage
108@end iftex
4ecceb71 109@contents
252b5132
RH
110@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
111
84ec0e6d 112@ifnottex
252b5132 113@node Top
71ba23f6 114@top LD
e49e529d
JM
115This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
116@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
117@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
118@end ifset
119version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 120
cf055d54 121This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
122Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
123in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 124
252b5132
RH
125@menu
126* Overview:: Overview
127* Invocation:: Invocation
128* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
129@ifset GENERIC
130* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
131@end ifset
132@ifclear GENERIC
133@ifset H8300
134* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
135@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
136@ifset Renesas
137* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
138@end ifset
139@ifset I960
140* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
141@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
142@ifset ARM
143* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
144@end ifset
145@ifset HPPA
146* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
147@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
148@ifset M68HC11
149* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
150@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
151@ifset M68K
152* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
153@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
154@ifset POWERPC
155* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
156@end ifset
157@ifset POWERPC64
158* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
159@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
160@ifset SPU
161* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
162@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
163@ifset TICOFF
164* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
165@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
166@ifset WIN32
167* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
168@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
169@ifset XTENSA
170* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
171@end ifset
252b5132
RH
172@end ifclear
173@ifclear SingleFormat
174* BFD:: BFD
175@end ifclear
176@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
177
178* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
179* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 180* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 181* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 182@end menu
84ec0e6d 183@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
184
185@node Overview
186@chapter Overview
187
188@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
189@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 190
0879a67a 191@ifset man
0285c67d 192@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 193ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
194@c man end
195
196@c man begin SEEALSO
197ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
198the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
199@file{ld}.
200@c man end
201@end ifset
202
203@c man begin DESCRIPTION
204
ff5dcc92 205@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 206their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 207compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 208
ff5dcc92 209@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
210a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
211to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
212
0285c67d
NC
213@ifset man
214@c For the man only
ece2d90e 215This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
216@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
217language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
218@end ifset
219
252b5132 220@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
221This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
222to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
223write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
224@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
225available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
226@end ifclear
227
228Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
229linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
230execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 231@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
232(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
233
0285c67d
NC
234@c man end
235
252b5132
RH
236@node Invocation
237@chapter Invocation
238
0285c67d
NC
239@c man begin DESCRIPTION
240
ff5dcc92 241The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
242and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
243you have many choices to control its behavior.
244
0285c67d
NC
245@c man end
246
252b5132
RH
247@ifset UsesEnvVars
248@menu
249* Options:: Command Line Options
250* Environment:: Environment Variables
251@end menu
252
253@node Options
254@section Command Line Options
255@end ifset
256
257@cindex command line
258@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
259
260@c man begin OPTIONS
261
252b5132
RH
262The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
263practice few of them are used in any particular context.
264@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 265For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
266object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
267link a file @code{hello.o}:
268
269@smallexample
270ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
271@end smallexample
272
ff5dcc92 273This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
274result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
275the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
276directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
277
ff5dcc92 278Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
279point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
280as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
281which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
282files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
283different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
284occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
285option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
286noted in the descriptions below.
287
288@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
289Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
290together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
291options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
292an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
293
294Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
295specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
296and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
297are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
298message @samp{No input files}.
299
36f63dca 300If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
301assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
302augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
303linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
304permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
305or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
306@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
307script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
308extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
309to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
310the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
311
312For options whose names are a single letter,
313option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
314whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
315option that requires them.
316
317For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 318precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 319@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 320this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 321only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
322@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
323name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
324output.
325
326Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
327option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
328immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
329@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
330Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
331accepted.
252b5132 332
36f63dca
NC
333Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
334(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
335prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
336compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
337
338@smallexample
2509a395 339 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
340@end smallexample
341
342This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
343silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
344may also arise when passing options that require values through a
345driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
346a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
347and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
348the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
349
350@smallexample
351 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
352@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
353
354Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
355linker:
356
ff5dcc92 357@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 358@include at-file.texi
dff70155 359
2509a395
SL
360@kindex -a @var{keyword}
361@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
362This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
363argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
364@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
365@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
366to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
367
7ee314fa
AM
368@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
371@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
372specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
373will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
374finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
375it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
377interface.
378
252b5132
RH
379@ifset I960
380@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
381@kindex -A @var{arch}
382@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
383@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
384@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
385In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
386Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
387@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
388the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 389archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
390family}, for details.
391
ff5dcc92 392Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
393other architecture families.
394@end ifset
395
396@ifclear SingleFormat
397@cindex binary input format
398@kindex -b @var{format}
399@kindex --format=@var{format}
400@cindex input format
401@cindex input format
402@item -b @var{input-format}
403@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
404@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
405file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 406@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 407that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 408configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 409to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
410default input format the most usual format on each machine.
411@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
412supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
413formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
414@xref{BFD}.
415
416You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
417binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
418linking object files of different formats), by including
419@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 420particular format.
252b5132
RH
421
422The default format is taken from the environment variable
423@code{GNUTARGET}.
424@ifset UsesEnvVars
425@xref{Environment}.
426@end ifset
427You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
428@code{TARGET};
429@ifclear man
430see @ref{Format Commands}.
431@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
432@end ifclear
433
434@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@cindex compatibility, MRI
437@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
438@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 439For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 440files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
441@ifclear man
442@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
443@end ifclear
444@ifset man
445the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
446@end ifset
447Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 448the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
449scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
450If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
451specified by any @samp{-L} options.
452
453@cindex common allocation
454@kindex -d
455@kindex -dc
456@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 457@item -d
252b5132
RH
458@itemx -dc
459@itemx -dp
460These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
461compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
462even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
463script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
464@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
465
7ee314fa
AM
466@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
467@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
468@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
469@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
470Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
471@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
472specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
473will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
474option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
475The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
476
252b5132
RH
477@cindex entry point, from command line
478@kindex -e @var{entry}
479@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 480@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
481@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
482Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
483program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
484named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
485and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
486base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
487@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
488and other ways of specifying the entry point.
489
b58f81ae
DJ
490@kindex --exclude-libs
491@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
492Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 493exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
494@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
495automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
496port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
497explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
498option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
499be treated as hidden.
500
e1c37eb5
DK
501@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
502@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
503Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
504should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
505into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
506may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
507used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
508the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
509match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
510command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
511of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
512regardless of this option.
513
252b5132
RH
514@cindex dynamic symbol table
515@kindex -E
516@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 517@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
518@item -E
519@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
520@itemx --no-export-dynamic
521When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
522option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
523all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
524set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
525
526If you do not use either of these options (or use the
527@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
528dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
529referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
530
531If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
532back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
533dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
534linking the program itself.
535
55255dae 536You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 537be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 538See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 539
8b747e1a
DK
540Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
541support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
542the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
543
36f63dca 544@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
545@cindex big-endian objects
546@cindex endianness
547@kindex -EB
548@item -EB
549Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
550
551@cindex little-endian objects
552@kindex -EL
553@item -EL
554Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 555@end ifclear
252b5132 556
2509a395
SL
557@kindex -f @var{name}
558@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
559@item -f @var{name}
560@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
561When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
562to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
563table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
564symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
565
566If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
567run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
568the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
569first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
570@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
571in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
572Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
573implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
574machine specific performance.
575
576This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
577will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
578
2509a395
SL
579@kindex -F @var{name}
580@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 581@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 582@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
583When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
584the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
585of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
586on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
587
588If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
589run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
590dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
591filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
592found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
593used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
594@var{name}.
595
ff5dcc92 596Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 597toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
598object files.
599@ifclear SingleFormat
600The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 601@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 602@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
603environment variable.
604@end ifclear
605The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
606creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 607
3dbf70a2 608@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
609@kindex -fini=@var{name}
610@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
611When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
612executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
613address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
614the function to call.
615
252b5132
RH
616@kindex -g
617@item -g
618Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
619
2509a395
SL
620@kindex -G @var{value}
621@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 622@cindex object size
2509a395 623@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
624@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
625Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
626@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
627MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
628sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
629
630@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 631@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 632@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 633@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
634@itemx -soname=@var{name}
635When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
636the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
637which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
638linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
639field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
640
641@kindex -i
642@cindex incremental link
643@item -i
644Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
645
3dbf70a2 646@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
647@kindex -init=@var{name}
648@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
649When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
650executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
651of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
652function to call.
653
252b5132 654@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 655@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 656@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 657@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
658@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
659Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
660list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
661If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 662will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 663will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 664
ff5dcc92 665On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
666files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
667and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
668called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
669@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
670indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
671to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
672@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
673
674The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
675specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
676was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
677command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
678archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
679the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
680
ff5dcc92 681See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
682archives multiple times.
683
684You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
685
686@ifset GENERIC
687This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 688if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
689behaviour of the AIX linker.
690@end ifset
691
692@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 693@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 694@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 695@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 696@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
697Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
698for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
699option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
700in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
701on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 702@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
703order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
704how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
705option is specified.
252b5132 706
9c8ebd6a
DJ
707If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
708by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
709
252b5132
RH
710@ifset UsesEnvVars
711The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 712@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
713some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
714@end ifset
715
716The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
717@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
718at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
719
720@cindex emulation
721@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 722@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
723Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
724emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
725
726If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
727@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
728
729Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
730configured.
731
732@cindex link map
733@kindex -M
734@kindex --print-map
735@item -M
736@itemx --print-map
737Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
738information about the link, including the following:
739
740@itemize @bullet
741@item
3b83e13a 742Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
743@item
744How common symbols are allocated.
745@item
746All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
747which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
748@item
749The values assigned to symbols.
750
751Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
752involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
753have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
754linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
755of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
756the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
757linker script containing:
758
759@smallexample
760 foo = 1
761 foo = foo * 4
762 foo = foo + 8
763@end smallexample
764
765will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
766option is used:
767
768@smallexample
769 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
771 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
772@end smallexample
773
774See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
775scripts.
252b5132
RH
776@end itemize
777
778@kindex -n
779@cindex read-only text
780@cindex NMAGIC
781@kindex --nmagic
782@item -n
783@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
784Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
785libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
786mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
787
788@kindex -N
789@kindex --omagic
790@cindex read/write from cmd line
791@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 792@item -N
252b5132
RH
793@itemx --omagic
794Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
795not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
796libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
797mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
798is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
799specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
800
801@kindex --no-omagic
802@cindex OMAGIC
803@item --no-omagic
804This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
805sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
806be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
807shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
808
809@kindex -o @var{output}
810@kindex --output=@var{output}
811@cindex naming the output file
812@item -o @var{output}
813@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 814Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
815option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
816script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
817
818@kindex -O @var{level}
819@cindex generating optimized output
820@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 821If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 822the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
823should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
824option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
825the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
826no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
827of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 828
a712da20
NC
829@kindex -q
830@kindex --emit-relocs
831@cindex retain relocations in final executable
832@item -q
833@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 834Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
835Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
836order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
837in larger executables.
838
dbab7a7b
NC
839This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
840
4f471f39
RS
841@kindex --force-dynamic
842@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
843@item --force-dynamic
844Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
845to VxWorks targets.
846
252b5132
RH
847@cindex partial link
848@cindex relocatable output
849@kindex -r
1049f94e 850@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 851@item -r
1049f94e 852@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 853Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 854turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
855linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
856magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
857@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 858@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
859If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
860linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
861constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
862
62bf86b4
HPN
863When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
864partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
865relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
866example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
867with input files in other formats at all.
868
252b5132
RH
869This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
870
871@kindex -R @var{file}
872@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
873@cindex symbol-only input
874@item -R @var{filename}
875@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
876Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
877relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
878to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
879programs. You may use this option more than once.
880
ff5dcc92 881For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 882followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 883the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
884
885@kindex -s
886@kindex --strip-all
887@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 888@item -s
252b5132
RH
889@itemx --strip-all
890Omit all symbol information from the output file.
891
892@kindex -S
893@kindex --strip-debug
894@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 895@item -S
252b5132
RH
896@itemx --strip-debug
897Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
898
899@kindex -t
900@kindex --trace
901@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 902@item -t
252b5132 903@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 904Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
905
906@kindex -T @var{script}
907@kindex --script=@var{script}
908@cindex script files
909@item -T @var{scriptfile}
910@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
911Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 912@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 913@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
914output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
915the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
916specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
917options accumulate.
252b5132 918
14be8564
L
919@kindex -dT @var{script}
920@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
921@cindex script files
922@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
923@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
924Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
925
926This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
927processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
928command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
929@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
930behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
931command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
932the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
933@samp{gcc}).
934
252b5132
RH
935@kindex -u @var{symbol}
936@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
937@cindex undefined symbol
938@item -u @var{symbol}
939@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
940Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
941symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
942modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
943different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
944option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
945
946@kindex -Ur
947@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 948@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
949For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
950@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 951turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
952@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
953It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
954with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
955be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
956@samp{-r} for the others.
957
577a0623
AM
958@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
960Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
961@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
962missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
963specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
964multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
965input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
966in a linker script.
a854a4a7 967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -v
969@kindex -V
970@kindex --version
971@cindex version
972@item -v
973@itemx --version
974@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 975Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
976lists the supported emulations.
977
978@kindex -x
979@kindex --discard-all
980@cindex deleting local symbols
981@item -x
982@itemx --discard-all
983Delete all local symbols.
984
985@kindex -X
986@kindex --discard-locals
987@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 988@item -X
252b5132 989@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
990Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
991system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
992or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
993
994@kindex -y @var{symbol}
995@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
996@cindex symbol tracing
997@item -y @var{symbol}
998@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
999Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1000option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1001to prepend an underscore.
1002
1003This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1004don't know where the reference is coming from.
1005
1006@kindex -Y @var{path}
1007@item -Y @var{path}
1008Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1009for Solaris compatibility.
1010
1011@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1012@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1013The recognized keywords are:
1014@table @samp
1015
1016@item combreloc
1017Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1018lookup caching possible.
1019
1020@item defs
560e09e9 1021Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1022shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1023
6aa29e7b
JJ
1024@item execstack
1025Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1026
cd6d6c15
NC
1027@item initfirst
1028This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1029It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1030before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1031the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1032the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1033objects.
1034
1035@item interpose
1036Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1037but the primary executable.
1038
5fa222e4
AM
1039@item lazy
1040When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1041dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1042the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1043Lazy binding is the default.
1044
cd6d6c15
NC
1045@item loadfltr
1046Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1047runtime.
1048
1049@item muldefs
1050Allows multiple definitions.
1051
1052@item nocombreloc
1053Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1054
1055@item nocopyreloc
1056Disables production of copy relocs.
1057
1058@item nodefaultlib
1059Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1060ignore any default library search paths.
1061
1062@item nodelete
1063Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1064
1065@item nodlopen
1066Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1067
1068@item nodump
1069Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1070
6aa29e7b
JJ
1071@item noexecstack
1072Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1073
1074@item norelro
1075Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1076
cd6d6c15
NC
1077@item now
1078When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1079dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1080when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1081deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1082first called.
1083
1084@item origin
1085Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1086
6aa29e7b
JJ
1087@item relro
1088Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1089
24718e3b
L
1090@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1091Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1092
1093@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1094Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1095
cd6d6c15
NC
1096@end table
1097
ece2d90e 1098Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1099
1100@kindex -(
1101@cindex groups of archives
1102@item -( @var{archives} -)
1103@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1104The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1105either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1106
1107The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1108references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1109the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1110archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1111object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1112would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1113they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1114resolved.
1115
1116Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1117it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1118more archives.
1119
69da35b5
NC
1120@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1123@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1124Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1125recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1126and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1127the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1128behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1129so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1130restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1131
4a43e768
AM
1132@kindex --as-needed
1133@kindex --no-as-needed
1134@item --as-needed
1135@itemx --no-as-needed
1136This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1137on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1138the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1139on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1140needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1141emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1142from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1143DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1144undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1145@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1146
e56f61be
L
1147@kindex --add-needed
1148@kindex --no-add-needed
1149@item --add-needed
1150@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1151These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1152their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1153options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1154and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1155
252b5132
RH
1156@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1157@item -assert @var{keyword}
1158This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1159
1160@kindex -Bdynamic
1161@kindex -dy
1162@kindex -call_shared
1163@item -Bdynamic
1164@itemx -dy
1165@itemx -call_shared
1166Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1167for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1168default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1169for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1170multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1171@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1172
a1ab1d2a
UD
1173@kindex -Bgroup
1174@item -Bgroup
1175Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1176section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1177object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1178@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1179only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1180
252b5132
RH
1181@kindex -Bstatic
1182@kindex -dn
1183@kindex -non_shared
1184@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1185@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1186@itemx -dn
1187@itemx -non_shared
1188@itemx -static
1189Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1190platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1191variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1192may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1193library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1194option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1195option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1196shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1197references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1198libraries.
252b5132
RH
1199
1200@kindex -Bsymbolic
1201@item -Bsymbolic
1202When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1203definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1204for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1205within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1206platforms which support shared libraries.
1207
40b36307
L
1208@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1209@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1210When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1211symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1212This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1213libraries.
1214
55255dae
L
1215@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1217Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1218typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1219global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1220within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1221to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1222in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1223which support shared libraries.
1224
1225The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1226scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1227
40b36307
L
1228@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1229@item --dynamic-list-data
1230Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1231
1232@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1234Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1235is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1236
0b8a70d9
L
1237@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1239Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1240
252b5132
RH
1241@kindex --check-sections
1242@kindex --no-check-sections
1243@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1244@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1245Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1246been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1247perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1248suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1249allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1250restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1251Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1252force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1253option.
252b5132 1254
ddbb8a31
NC
1255@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1258@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1259This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1260by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1261command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1262output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1263input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1264specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1265follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1266behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1267
1268This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1269libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1270mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1271their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1272required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1273the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1274dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1275symbols.
1276
252b5132
RH
1277@cindex cross reference table
1278@kindex --cref
1279@item --cref
1280Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
4818e05f
AM
1290@cindex common allocation
1291@kindex --no-define-common
1292@item --no-define-common
1293This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
252b5132 1308@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1309@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1311Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321@var{expression}.
1322
1323@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1324@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1325@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1326@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1327@itemx --no-demangle
1328These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1335demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1337
1338@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1339@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1340@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341@item -I@var{file}
1342@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1343Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346doing.
1347
7ce691ae 1348@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1349@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1350@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1351@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1354
252b5132
RH
1355@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356@item --force-exe-suffix
1357Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366@kindex --gc-sections
1367@kindex --no-gc-sections
1368@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1369@item --gc-sections
1370@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1371Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1372targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1373performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1375
d5465ba2
AM
1376@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
ac69cbc6 1386This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1387@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1388specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
c17d87de
NC
1391@kindex --print-gc-sections
1392@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393@cindex garbage collection
1394@item --print-gc-sections
1395@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401line.
1402
30824704
RM
1403@kindex --print-output-format
1404@cindex output format
1405@item --print-output-format
1406Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1407other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1408in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1409
252b5132
RH
1410@cindex help
1411@cindex usage
1412@kindex --help
1413@item --help
1414Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1415
ea20a7da
CC
1416@kindex --target-help
1417@item --target-help
1418Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1419
2509a395
SL
1420@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1421@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1422Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1423@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1424
1425@cindex memory usage
1426@kindex --no-keep-memory
1427@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1428@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1429symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1430instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1431necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1432while linking a large executable.
1433
1434@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1435@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1436@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1437@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1438Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1439is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1440The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1441behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1442libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1443
aa713662
L
1444@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1445@kindex -z muldefs
1446@item --allow-multiple-definition
1447@itemx -z muldefs
1448Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1449report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1450first definition will be used.
1451
b79e8c78 1452@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1453@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1454@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1455@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1456Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1457This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1458determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1459shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1460how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1461
903249d7
NC
1462The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1463referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1464an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1465a shared library.
1466
1467The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1468libraries specified at link time are that:
1469
1470@itemize @bullet
1471@item
1472A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1473that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1474resolvable at load time.
1475@item
1476There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1477symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1478
1479The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1480select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1481architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1482appropriate memset function.
1483@end itemize
b79e8c78 1484
31941635
L
1485@kindex --no-undefined-version
1486@item --no-undefined-version
1487Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1488it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1489will be issued instead.
1490
3e3b46e5
PB
1491@kindex --default-symver
1492@item --default-symver
1493Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1494exported symbols.
1495
1496@kindex --default-imported-symver
1497@item --default-imported-symver
1498Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1499imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1500
252b5132
RH
1501@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1502@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1503Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1504files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1505been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1506This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1507errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1508have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1509inappropriate.
1510
fe7929ce
AM
1511@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1512@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1513Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1514library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1515
252b5132
RH
1516@kindex --no-whole-archive
1517@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1518Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1519archive files.
1520
1521@cindex output file after errors
1522@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1523@item --noinhibit-exec
1524Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1525Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1526errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1527when it issues any error whatsoever.
1528
0a9c1c8e
CD
1529@kindex -nostdlib
1530@item -nostdlib
1531Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1532command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1533(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1534
252b5132 1535@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1536@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1537@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1538@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1539file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1540@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1541object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1542object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1543should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1544usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1545name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1546list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1547command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1548this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1549@end ifclear
1550
36af4a4e
JJ
1551@kindex -pie
1552@kindex --pic-executable
1553@item -pie
1554@itemx --pic-executable
1555@cindex position independent executables
1556Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1557ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1558libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1559address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1560normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1561defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1562
252b5132
RH
1563@kindex -qmagic
1564@item -qmagic
1565This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1566
1567@kindex -Qy
1568@item -Qy
1569This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1570
1571@kindex --relax
1572@cindex synthesizing linker
1573@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1574@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1575@item --relax
28d5f677 1576@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1577An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1578@ifset GENERIC
1579This option is only supported on a few targets.
1580@end ifset
1581@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1582@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1583@end ifset
1584@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1585@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1586@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1587@ifset XTENSA
1588@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1589@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1590@ifset M68HC11
1591@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1592@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1593@ifset POWERPC
1594@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1595@end ifset
252b5132 1596
28d5f677
NC
1597On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1598global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1599addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1600synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1601instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1602
1603On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1604debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1605@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1606This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1607family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1608@end ifset
1609
1610@ifset GENERIC
1611On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1612but ignored.
1613@end ifset
1614
28d5f677
NC
1615On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1616@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1617
252b5132
RH
1618@cindex retaining specified symbols
1619@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1620@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1621@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1622@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1623Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1624discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1625symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1626@ifset GENERIC
1627(such as VxWorks)
1628@end ifset
1629where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1630run-time memory.
1631
1632@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1633or symbols needed for relocations.
1634
1635You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1636line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1637
1638@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1639@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1640@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1641@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1642Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1643linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1644arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1645them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1646also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1647objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1648@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1649ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1650@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1651
ff5dcc92 1652The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1653SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1654@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1655runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1656options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1657gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1658file systems.
252b5132 1659
ff5dcc92 1660For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1661followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1662the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1663@end ifset
1664
1665@ifset GENERIC
1666@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1667@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1668@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1669When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1670happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1671of the input files.
1672
1673When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1674non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1675shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1676explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1677specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1678@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1679either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1680appearing multiple times.
1681
28c309a2
NC
1682This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1683that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1684is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1685runtime linker would do.
1686
252b5132 1687The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1688libraries:
252b5132
RH
1689@enumerate
1690@item
ff5dcc92 1691Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1692@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1693Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1694between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1695specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1696used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1697at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1698by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1699the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1700@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1701On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1702@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1703environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1704@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1705On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1706directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1707@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1708For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1709variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1710@item
ec4eb78a
L
1711For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1712@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1713libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1714@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1715@item
252b5132
RH
1716The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1717@item
1718For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1719exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1720@end enumerate
1721
1722If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1723warning and continue with the link.
1724@end ifset
1725
1726@kindex -shared
1727@kindex -Bshareable
1728@item -shared
1729@itemx -Bshareable
1730@cindex shared libraries
1731Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1732and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1733shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1734undefined symbols in the link.
1735
252b5132 1736@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1737@item --sort-common
1738@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1739@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1740This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1741ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1742sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1743eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1744between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1745specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1746
2509a395
SL
1747@kindex --sort-section=name
1748@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1749This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1750patterns in the linker script.
1751
2509a395
SL
1752@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1753@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1754This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1755patterns in the linker script.
1756
252b5132 1757@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1758@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1759Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1760each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1761size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1762
1763@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1764@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1765Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1766output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1767This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1768certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1769cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1770that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1771support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1772input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1773more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1774many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1775
1776@kindex --stats
1777@item --stats
1778Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1779as execution time and memory usage.
1780
2509a395 1781@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1782@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1783Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1784configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1785that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1786
252b5132
RH
1787@kindex --traditional-format
1788@cindex traditional format
1789@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1790For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1791the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1792use the traditional format instead.
1793
1794@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1795For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1796symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1797full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1798@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1799trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1800combine duplicate entries.
1801
2509a395
SL
1802@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1803@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1804Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1805address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1806times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1807line.
1808@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1809for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1810@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1811should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1812sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1813
2509a395
SL
1814@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1815@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1816@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1817@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1818@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1819@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1820@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1821Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1822@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1823
2509a395
SL
1824@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1825@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1826@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1827When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1828of the first byte of the text segment.
1829
560e09e9
NC
1830@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1831@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1832Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1833values for @samp{method}:
1834
1835@table @samp
1836@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1837Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1838
1839@item report-all
da8bce14 1840Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1841
1842@item ignore-in-object-files
1843Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1844ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1845
1846@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1847Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1848ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1849when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1850libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1851command line.
1852@end table
1853
1854The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1855by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1856
1857Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1858unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1859can change this to a warning.
1860
1715a13c
L
1861@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1862@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1863@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1864@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1865Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1866supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1867the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1868argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1869
1870@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1871@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1872@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1873Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1874used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1875about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1876is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1877see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1878use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1879symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1880@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1881
7ce691ae 1882@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1883@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1884@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1885@item --warn-common
1886Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1887a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1888but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1889you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1890Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1891warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1892
1893There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1894
1895@table @samp
1896@item int i = 1;
1897A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1898file.
1899
1900@item extern int i;
1901An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1902There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1903variable somewhere.
1904
1905@item int i;
1906A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1907variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1908The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1909single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1910size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1911a definition of the same variable.
1912@end table
1913
1914The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1915Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1916just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1917encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1918a common symbol.
1919
1920@enumerate
1921@item
1922Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1923definition for the symbol.
1924@smallexample
1925@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1926 overridden by definition
1927@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1928@end smallexample
1929
1930@item
1931Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1932the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1933except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1934@smallexample
1935@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1936 overriding common
1937@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1938@end smallexample
1939
1940@item
1941Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1942@smallexample
1943@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1944 of `@var{symbol}'
1945@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1946@end smallexample
1947
1948@item
1949Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1950@smallexample
1951@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1952 overridden by larger common
1953@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1954@end smallexample
1955
1956@item
1957Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1958the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1959encountered in a different order.
1960@smallexample
1961@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1962 overriding smaller common
1963@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1964@end smallexample
1965@end enumerate
1966
1967@kindex --warn-constructors
1968@item --warn-constructors
1969Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1970object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1971detect the use of global constructors.
1972
1973@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1974@item --warn-multiple-gp
1975Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1976This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1977Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1978section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1979of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1980base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1981base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1982bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1983large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1984values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1985option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1986
1987@kindex --warn-once
1988@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1989@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1990@item --warn-once
1991Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1992which refers to it.
1993
1994@kindex --warn-section-align
1995@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1996@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1997@item --warn-section-align
1998Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1999alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2000The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2001is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2002the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2003
8fdd7217
NC
2004@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2005@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2006Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2007
a0c402a5
L
2008@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2009@item --warn-alternate-em
2010Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2011
560e09e9
NC
2012@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2013@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2014If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2015@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2016This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2017
2018@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2019@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2020This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2021it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2022
252b5132
RH
2023@kindex --whole-archive
2024@cindex including an entire archive
2025@item --whole-archive
2026For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2027@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2028in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2029files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2030library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2031library. This option may be used more than once.
2032
7ec229ce 2033Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2034about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2035Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2036list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2037your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2038
2509a395
SL
2039@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2040@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2041Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2042@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2043undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2044@var{symbol}.
2045
2046This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2047wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2048wishes to call the system function, it should call
2049@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2050
2051Here is a trivial example:
2052
2053@smallexample
2054void *
cc2f008e 2055__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2056@{
cc2f008e 2057 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2058 return __real_malloc (c);
2059@}
2060@end smallexample
2061
ff5dcc92 2062If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2063all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2064instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2065call the real @code{malloc} function.
2066
2067You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2068links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2069you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2070file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2071call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2072
6aa29e7b
JJ
2073@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2074@item --eh-frame-hdr
2075Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2076@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2077
e41b3a13
JJ
2078@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2079@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2080Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2081generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2082if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2083
6c1439be
L
2084@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2085@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2086@item --enable-new-dtags
2087@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2088This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2089systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2090@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2091If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2092created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2093those options are only available for ELF systems.
2094
2d643429 2095@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2096@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2097Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2098close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2099time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2100increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2101value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2102
fdc90cb4
JJ
2103@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2104@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2105Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2106@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2107new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2108the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2109hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2110
35835446
JR
2111@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2112@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2113This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2114linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2115for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2116about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2117
4f9c04f7 2118Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21191021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2120run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2121has been used.
2122
2123The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2124enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2125
c0065db7
RM
2126@kindex --build-id
2127@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2128@item --build-id
2129@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2130Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2131The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2132file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2133@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2134parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2135@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2136@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2137an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2138characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2139omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2140
2141The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2142that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2143unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2144to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2145file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2146string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2147
2148Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2149@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2150@end table
2151
0285c67d
NC
2152@c man end
2153
36f63dca 2154@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2155
0285c67d
NC
2156@c man begin OPTIONS
2157
ff5dcc92 2158The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2159the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2160normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2161use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2162@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2163like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2164symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2165object file).
2166
2167In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2168support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2169PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2170values by either a space or an equals sign.
2171
ff5dcc92 2172@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2173
2174@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2175@item --add-stdcall-alias
2176If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2177as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2178[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2179
2180@kindex --base-file
2181@item --base-file @var{file}
2182Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2183addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2184@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2185[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2186
2187@kindex --dll
2188@item --dll
2189Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2190@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2191file.
bb10df36 2192[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2193
88183869
DK
2194@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2195@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2196@item --enable-long-section-names
2197@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2198The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2199the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2200for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2201fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2202to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2203allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2204disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2205generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2206as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2207with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2208GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2209information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2210option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2211section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2212when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2213image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2214[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2215
252b5132
RH
2216@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2217@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2218@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2219@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2220If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2221do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2222only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2223resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2224undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2225@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2226to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2227warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2228import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2229to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2230feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2231@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2232mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2233[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2234
522f09cd
KT
2235@kindex --leading-underscore
2236@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2237@item --leading-underscore
2238@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2239For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2240in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2241disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2242
252b5132
RH
2243@cindex DLLs, creating
2244@kindex --export-all-symbols
2245@item --export-all-symbols
2246If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2247be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2248otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2249explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2250attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2251option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2252@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2253@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2254exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2255re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2256such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2257@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2258@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2259Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2260not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2261extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2262(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2263These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2264@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2265@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2266@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2267@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2268[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2269
2270@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2271@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2272Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2273exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2274[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2275
2927aaca
NC
2276@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2277@item --exclude-all-symbols
2278Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2279[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2280
252b5132
RH
2281@kindex --file-alignment
2282@item --file-alignment
2283Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2284file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2285512.
bb10df36 2286[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2287
2288@cindex heap size
2289@kindex --heap
2290@item --heap @var{reserve}
2291@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2292Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2293to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2294committed.
bb10df36 2295[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2296
2297@cindex image base
2298@kindex --image-base
2299@item --image-base @var{value}
2300Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2301the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2302is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2303your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2304other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2305for dlls.
bb10df36 2306[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2307
2308@kindex --kill-at
2309@item --kill-at
2310If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2311symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2312[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2313
26d2d8a2
BF
2314@kindex --large-address-aware
2315@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2316If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2317header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2318greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2319or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2320section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2321[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2322
252b5132
RH
2323@kindex --major-image-version
2324@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2325Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2326[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2327
2328@kindex --major-os-version
2329@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2330Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2331[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2332
2333@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2334@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2335Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2336[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2337
2338@kindex --minor-image-version
2339@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2340Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2341[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2342
2343@kindex --minor-os-version
2344@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2345Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2346[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2347
2348@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2349@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2350Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2351[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2352
2353@cindex DEF files, creating
2354@cindex DLLs, creating
2355@kindex --output-def
2356@item --output-def @var{file}
2357The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2358file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2359(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2360library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2361automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2362[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2363
b044cda1
CW
2364@cindex DLLs, creating
2365@kindex --out-implib
2366@item --out-implib @var{file}
2367The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2368import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2369import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2370may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2371makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2372creation step.
bb10df36 2373[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2374
2375@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2376@item --enable-auto-image-base
2377Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2378using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2379from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2380collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2381avoided.
bb10df36 2382[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2383
2384@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2385@item --disable-auto-image-base
2386Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2387user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2388default.
bb10df36 2389[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2390
2391@cindex DLLs, linking to
2392@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2393@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2394When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2395search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2396@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2397between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2398uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2399@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2400[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2401
2402@kindex --enable-auto-import
2403@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2404Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2405DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2406building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2407'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2408to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2409specification published by Microsoft.
2410
e2a83dd0
NC
2411Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2412data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2413placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2414around a problem with consts that is described here:
2415http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2416
4d8907ac
DS
2417Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2418see this message:
0d888aac 2419
ece2d90e 2420"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2421documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2422
ece2d90e
NC
2423This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2424ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2425allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2426fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2427constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2428multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2429this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2430of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2431the warning, and exit.
2432
2433There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2434data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2435
2fa9fc65
NC
2436One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2437of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2438this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2439
c0065db7
RM
2440A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2441that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2442there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2443a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2444
2445@example
2446extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2447extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2448 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2449@end example
2450
2451or
2452
2453@example
2454extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2455extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2456 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2457@end example
2458
c0065db7 2459For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2460is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2461
2462@example
2463extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2464extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2465 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2466@end example
2467
c406afaf
NC
2468or
2469
2470@example
2471extern long long extern_ll;
2472extern_ll -->
2473 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2474@end example
2475
2fa9fc65 2476A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2477'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2478@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2479requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2480building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2481merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2482between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2483constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2484
2485Original:
2486@example
2487--foo.h
2488extern int arr[];
2489--foo.c
2490#include "foo.h"
2491void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2492 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2493@}
2494@end example
2495
2496Solution 1:
2497@example
2498--foo.h
2499extern int arr[];
2500--foo.c
2501#include "foo.h"
2502void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2503 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2504 volatile int *parr = arr;
2505 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2506@}
2507@end example
2508
2509Solution 2:
2510@example
2511--foo.h
2512/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2513#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2514 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2515#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2516#else
2517#define FOO_IMPORT
2518#endif
2519extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2520--foo.c
2521#include "foo.h"
2522void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2523 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2524@}
2525@end example
2526
c0065db7 2527A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2528library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2529for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2530functions).
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2532
2533@kindex --disable-auto-import
2534@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2535Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2536@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2537[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2538
2fa9fc65
NC
2539@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2540@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2541If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2542that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2543a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2544environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2545[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2546
2547@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2548@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2549Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2550DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2551[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2552
b044cda1
CW
2553@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2554@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2555Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2556[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2557
252b5132
RH
2558@kindex --section-alignment
2559@item --section-alignment
2560Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2561addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2562[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2563
2564@cindex stack size
2565@kindex --stack
2566@item --stack @var{reserve}
2567@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2568Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2569to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2570committed.
bb10df36 2571[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2572
2573@kindex --subsystem
2574@item --subsystem @var{which}
2575@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2576@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2577Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2578legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2579@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2580the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2581@var{which}.
bb10df36 2582[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2583
2f563b51
DK
2584The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2585of the PE file header:
2586[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2587
2588@kindex --dynamicbase
2589@item --dynamicbase
2590The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2591randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2592Vista for i386 PE targets.
2593
2594@kindex --forceinteg
2595@item --forceinteg
2596Code integrity checks are enforced.
2597
2598@kindex --nxcompat
2599@item --nxcompat
2600The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2601This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2602
2603@kindex --no-isolation
2604@item --no-isolation
2605Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2606
2607@kindex --no-seh
2608@item --no-seh
2609The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2610this image.
2611
2612@kindex --no-bind
2613@item --no-bind
2614Do not bind this image.
2615
2616@kindex --wdmdriver
2617@item --wdmdriver
2618The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2619
2620@kindex --tsaware
2621@item --tsaware
2622The image is Terminal Server aware.
2623
252b5132
RH
2624@end table
2625
0285c67d
NC
2626@c man end
2627
ac145307
BS
2628@ifset C6X
2629@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2630
2631@c man begin OPTIONS
2632
2633The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2634libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2635all executables use an index of 0.
2636
2637@table @gcctabopt
2638
2639@kindex --dsbt-size
2640@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2641This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2642or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2643entries.
2644
2645@kindex --dsbt-index
2646@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2647This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2648to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2649executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2650@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2651
fbd9ad90
PB
2652@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2653The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2654exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2655
ac145307
BS
2656@end table
2657
2658@c man end
2659@end ifset
2660
93fd0973
SC
2661@ifset M68HC11
2662@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2663
2664@c man begin OPTIONS
2665
2666The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2667memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2668
2669@table @gcctabopt
2670
2671@kindex --no-trampoline
2672@item --no-trampoline
2673This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2674is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2675instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2676
2677@kindex --bank-window
2678@item --bank-window @var{name}
2679This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2680the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2681The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2682paging and addresses within the memory window.
2683
2684@end table
2685
2686@c man end
2687@end ifset
2688
7fb9f789
NC
2689@ifset M68K
2690@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2691
2692@c man begin OPTIONS
2693
2694The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2695when linking for 68K targets.
2696
2697@table @gcctabopt
2698
2699@kindex --got
2700@item --got=@var{type}
2701This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2702@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2703@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2704Info entry for @file{ld}.
2705
2706@end table
2707
2708@c man end
2709@end ifset
2710
252b5132
RH
2711@ifset UsesEnvVars
2712@node Environment
2713@section Environment Variables
2714
0285c67d
NC
2715@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2716
560e09e9 2717You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2718@ifclear SingleFormat
2719@code{GNUTARGET},
2720@end ifclear
2721@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2722
36f63dca 2723@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2724@kindex GNUTARGET
2725@cindex default input format
2726@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2727use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2728of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2729@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2730of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2731attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2732this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2733there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2734object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2735BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2736in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2737@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2738
2739@kindex LDEMULATION
2740@cindex default emulation
2741@cindex emulation, default
2742@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2743@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2744behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2745available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2746the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2747variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2748linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2749
2750@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2751@cindex demangling, default
2752Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2753@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2754default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2755a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2756may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2757options.
2758
0285c67d
NC
2759@c man end
2760@end ifset
2761
252b5132
RH
2762@node Scripts
2763@chapter Linker Scripts
2764
2765@cindex scripts
2766@cindex linker scripts
2767@cindex command files
2768Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2769written in the linker command language.
2770
2771The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2772the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2773the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2774more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2775direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2776described below.
2777
2778The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2779yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2780linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2781to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2782such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2783
2784You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2785line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2786default linker script.
2787
2788You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2789to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2790Linker Scripts}.
2791
2792@menu
2793* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2794* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2795* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2796* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2797* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2798* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2799* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2800* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2801* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2802* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2803* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2804@end menu
2805
2806@node Basic Script Concepts
2807@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2808@cindex linker script concepts
2809We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2810describe the linker script language.
2811
2812The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2813file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2814@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2815The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2816purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2817among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2818section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2819in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2820
2821Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2822also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2823contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2824the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2825A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2826area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2827loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2828which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2829of debugging information.
2830
2831Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2832first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2833the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2834@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2835section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2836same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2837is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2838(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2839based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2840RAM address would be the VMA.
2841
2842You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2843program with the @samp{-h} option.
2844
2845Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2846@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2847has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2848information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2849will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2850static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2851referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2852
2853You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2854program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2855option.
2856
2857@node Script Format
2858@section Linker Script Format
2859@cindex linker script format
2860Linker scripts are text files.
2861
2862You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2863either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2864symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2865generally ignored.
2866
2867Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2868If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2869otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2870double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2871file name.
2872
2873You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2874@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2875to whitespace.
2876
2877@node Simple Example
2878@section Simple Linker Script Example
2879@cindex linker script example
2880@cindex example of linker script
2881Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2882
2883The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2884@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2885memory layout of the output file.
2886
2887The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2888describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2889code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2890@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2891Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2892your input files.
2893
2894For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28950x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2896linker script which will do that:
2897@smallexample
2898SECTIONS
2899@{
2900 . = 0x10000;
2901 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2902 . = 0x8000000;
2903 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2904 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2905@}
2906@end smallexample
2907
2908You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2909followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2910descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2911
252b5132
RH
2912The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2913sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2914counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2915other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2916current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2917incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2918@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2919
2920The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2921required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2922after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2923which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2924wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2925means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2926
2927Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2928@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2929@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2930
2931The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2932the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2933at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2934output section, the value of the location counter will be
2935@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2936effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2937immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2938
2939The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2940alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2941example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2942sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2943may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2944sections.
2945
2946That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2947
2948@node Simple Commands
2949@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2950@cindex linker script simple commands
2951In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2952
2953@menu
2954* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2955* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2956@ifclear SingleFormat
2957* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2958@end ifclear
2959
4a93e180 2960* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2961* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2962@end menu
2963
2964@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2965@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2966@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2967@cindex start of execution
2968@cindex first instruction
2969@cindex entry point
2970The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2971point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2972entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2973@smallexample
2974ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2975@end smallexample
2976
2977There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2978entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2979stopping when one of them succeeds:
2980@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2981@item
252b5132 2982the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2983@item
252b5132 2984the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2985@item
3ab904c4
NC
2986the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2987targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2988check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2989@item
252b5132 2990the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2991@item
252b5132
RH
2992The address @code{0}.
2993@end itemize
2994
2995@node File Commands
36f63dca 2996@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2997@cindex linker script file commands
2998Several linker script commands deal with files.
2999
3000@table @code
3001@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3002@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3003@cindex including a linker script
3004Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3005be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3006with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
300710 levels deep.
3008
4006703d
NS
3009You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3010@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3011
252b5132
RH
3012@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3013@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3014@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3015@cindex input files in linker scripts
3016@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3017@cindex linker script input object files
3018The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3019in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3020
3021For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3022a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3023then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3024
3025In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3026script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3027
e3f2db7f
AO
3028In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3029with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3030located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3031for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3032open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3033linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3034description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3035
ff5dcc92 3036If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3037name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3038@samp{-l}.
3039
3040When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3041files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3042script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3043
3044@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3045@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3046@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3047@cindex grouping input files
3048The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3049files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3050new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3051in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3052
b717d30e
JJ
3053@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3054@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3055@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3056This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3057commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3058as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3059with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3060when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3061@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3062and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3063setting afterwards.
3064
252b5132
RH
3065@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3066@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3067@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3068The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3069@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3070@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3071Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3072precedence.
3073
3074You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3075output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3076
3077@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3078@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3079@cindex library search path in linker script
3080@cindex archive search path in linker script
3081@cindex search path in linker script
3082The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3083@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3084@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3085on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3086are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3087the command line option are searched first.
3088
3089@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3090@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3091@cindex first input file
3092The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3093that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3094though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3095when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3096first file.
3097@end table
3098
3099@ifclear SingleFormat
3100@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3101@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3102A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3103
3104@table @code
3105@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3106@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3107@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3108@cindex output file format in linker script
3109The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3110output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3111exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3112(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3113line option takes precedence.
3114
3115You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3116formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3117This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3118desired endianness.
3119
3120If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3121will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3122output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3123used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3124
3125For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3126command:
3127@smallexample
3128OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3129@end smallexample
3130This says that the default format for the output file is
3131@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3132option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3133format.
3134
3135@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3136@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3137@cindex input file format in linker script
3138The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3139files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3140This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3141(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3142is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3143command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3144@end table
3145@end ifclear
3146
4a93e180
NC
3147@node REGION_ALIAS
3148@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3149@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3150@cindex region alias
3151@cindex region names
3152
3153Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3154@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3155
3156@smallexample
3157REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3158@end smallexample
3159
3160The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3161memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3162to memory regions. An example follows.
3163
3164Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3165memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3166that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3167non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3168access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3169read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3170sections:
3171
3172@itemize @bullet
3173@item
3174@code{.text} program code;
3175@item
3176@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3177@item
3178@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3179@item
3180@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3181@end itemize
3182
3183The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3184part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3185output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3186systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3187@code{C}:
3188@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3189@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3190@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3191@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3192@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3193@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3194@end multitable
3195The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3196loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3197the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3198the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3199
3200The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3201includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3202memory layout:
3203@smallexample
3204INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3205
3206SECTIONS
3207 @{
3208 .text :
3209 @{
3210 *(.text)
3211 @} > REGION_TEXT
3212 .rodata :
3213 @{
3214 *(.rodata)
3215 rodata_end = .;
3216 @} > REGION_RODATA
3217 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3218 @{
3219 data_start = .;
3220 *(.data)
3221 @} > REGION_DATA
3222 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3223 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3224 .bss :
3225 @{
3226 *(.bss)
3227 @} > REGION_BSS
3228 @}
3229@end smallexample
3230
3231Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3232regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3233variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3234@table @code
3235@item A
3236Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3237@smallexample
3238MEMORY
3239 @{
3240 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3241 @}
3242
3243REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3244REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3245REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3246REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3247@end smallexample
3248@item B
3249Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3250into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3251@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3252@smallexample
3253MEMORY
3254 @{
3255 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3256 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3257 @}
3258
3259REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3260REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3261REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3262REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3263@end smallexample
3264@item C
3265Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3266@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3267initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3268system start into the @code{RAM}.
3269@smallexample
3270MEMORY
3271 @{
3272 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3273 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3274 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3275 @}
3276
3277REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3278REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3279REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3280REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3281@end smallexample
3282@end table
3283
3284It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3285@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3286necessary:
3287@smallexample
3288#include <string.h>
3289
3290extern char data_start [];
3291extern char data_size [];
3292extern char data_load_start [];
3293
3294void copy_data(void)
3295@{
3296 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3297 @{
3298 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3299 @}
3300@}
3301@end smallexample
3302
252b5132 3303@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3304@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3305There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3306
3307@table @code
3308@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3309@kindex ASSERT
3310@cindex assertion in linker script
3311Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3312with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3313
3314@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3315@kindex EXTERN
3316@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3317Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3318symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3319modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3320each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3321command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3322
3323@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3324@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3325@cindex common allocation in linker script
3326This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3327to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3328output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3329
4818e05f
AM
3330@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3331@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3332@cindex common allocation in linker script
3333This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3334command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3335to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3336
53d25da6
AM
3337@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3338@kindex INSERT
3339@cindex insert user script into default script
3340This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3341augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3342inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3343@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3344default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3345sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3346linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3347insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3348linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3349default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3350of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3351to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3352is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3353
3354@smallexample
3355SECTIONS
3356@{
3357 OVERLAY :
3358 @{
3359 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3360 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3361 @}
3362@}
3363INSERT AFTER .text;
3364@end smallexample
3365
252b5132
RH
3366@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3367@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3368@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3369This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3370references among certain output sections.
3371
3372In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3373using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3374will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3375errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3376a function defined in the other section.
3377
3378The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3379@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3380an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3381@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3382names.
3383
3384@ifclear SingleFormat
3385@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3386@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3387@cindex machine architecture
3388@cindex architecture
3389Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3390of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3391architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3392the @samp{-f} option.
3393@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3394
3395@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3396@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3397This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3398@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3399in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3400@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3401@end table
3402
3403@node Assignments
3404@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3405@cindex assignment in scripts
3406@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3407@cindex variables, defining
3408You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3409the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3410
3411@menu
3412* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3413* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3414* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3415* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3416* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3417@end menu
3418
3419@node Simple Assignments
3420@subsection Simple Assignments
3421
3422You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3423
3424@table @code
3425@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3426@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3427@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3428@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3429@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3430@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3431@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3432@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3433@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3434@end table
3435
3436The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3437@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3438defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3439
3440The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3441may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3442
3443The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3444
3445Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3446
3447You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3448statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3449section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3450
3451The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3452expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3453
3454Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3455assignments may be used:
3456
3457@smallexample
3458floating_point = 0;
3459SECTIONS
3460@{
3461 .text :
3462 @{
3463 *(.text)
3464 _etext = .;
3465 @}
156e34dd 3466 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3467 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3468@}
3469@end smallexample
3470@noindent
3471In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3472zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3473the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3474defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3475upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3476
eb8476a6
MR
3477@node HIDDEN
3478@subsection HIDDEN
3479@cindex HIDDEN
3480For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3481exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3482
3483Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3484@code{HIDDEN}:
3485
3486@smallexample
3487HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3488SECTIONS
3489@{
3490 .text :
3491 @{
3492 *(.text)
3493 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3494 @}
3495 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3496 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3497@}
3498@end smallexample
3499@noindent
3500In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3501
252b5132
RH
3502@node PROVIDE
3503@subsection PROVIDE
3504@cindex PROVIDE
3505In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3506only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3507the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3508@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3509@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3510@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3511@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3512@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3513
3514Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3515@smallexample
3516SECTIONS
3517@{
3518 .text :
3519 @{
3520 *(.text)
3521 _etext = .;
3522 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3523 @}
3524@}
3525@end smallexample
3526
3527In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3528underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3529the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3530underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3531If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3532linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3533
7af8e998
L
3534@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3535@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3536@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3537Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3538hidden and won't be exported.
3539
73ae6183
NC
3540@node Source Code Reference
3541@subsection Source Code Reference
3542
3543Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3544intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3545a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3546symbol that does not have a value.
3547
3548Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3549transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3550stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3551prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3552mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3553of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3554variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3555linker script variable might be referred to as:
3556
3557@smallexample
3558 extern int foo;
3559@end smallexample
3560
3561But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3562
3563@smallexample
3564 _foo = 1000;
3565@end smallexample
3566
3567In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3568transformation has taken place.
3569
3570When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3571things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3572in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3573second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3574table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3575contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3576value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3577
3578@smallexample
3579 int foo = 1000;
3580@end smallexample
3581
3582creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3583holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3584number 1000 is initially stored.
3585
3586When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3587first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3588memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3589So:
3590
3591@smallexample
3592 foo = 1;
3593@end smallexample
3594
3595looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3596associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3597address. Whereas:
3598
3599@smallexample
3600 int * a = & foo;
3601@end smallexample
3602
3603looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3604and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3605the variable @samp{a}.
3606
3607Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3608the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3609an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3610
3611@smallexample
3612 foo = 1000;
3613@end smallexample
3614
3615creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3616the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3617address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3618linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3619access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3620
3621Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3622you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3623use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3624section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3625linker script contains these declarations:
3626
3627@smallexample
3628@group
3629 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3630 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3631 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3632@end group
3633@end smallexample
3634
3635Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3636
3637@smallexample
3638@group
3639 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3640
73ae6183
NC
3641 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3642@end group
3643@end smallexample
3644
3645Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3646
252b5132 3647@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3648@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3649@kindex SECTIONS
3650The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3651into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3652
3653The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3654@smallexample
3655SECTIONS
3656@{
3657 @var{sections-command}
3658 @var{sections-command}
3659 @dots{}
3660@}
3661@end smallexample
3662
3663Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3664
3665@itemize @bullet
3666@item
3667an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3668@item
3669a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3670@item
3671an output section description
3672@item
3673an overlay description
3674@end itemize
3675
3676The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3677@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3678those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3679understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3680the layout of the output file.
3681
3682Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3683below.
3684
3685If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3686linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3687section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3688input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3689example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3690in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3691
3692@menu
3693* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3694* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3695* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3696* Input Section:: Input section description
3697* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3698* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3699* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3700* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3701* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3702@end menu
3703
3704@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3705@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3706The full description of an output section looks like this:
3707@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3708@group
7e7d5768 3709@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3710 [AT(@var{lma})]
3711 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3712 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3713 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3714 @{
3715 @var{output-section-command}
3716 @var{output-section-command}
3717 @dots{}
562d3460 3718 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3719@end group
3720@end smallexample
3721
3722Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3723
3724The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3725name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3726The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3727
3728Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3729
3730@itemize @bullet
3731@item
3732a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3733@item
3734an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3735@item
3736data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3737@item
3738a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3739@end itemize
3740
3741@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3742@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3743@cindex name, section
3744@cindex section name
3745The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3746meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3747support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3748must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3749example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3750output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3751names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3752quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3753characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3754commas must be quoted.
3755
3756The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3757Discarding}.
3758
3759@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3760@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3761@cindex address, section
3762@cindex section address
3763The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3764address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3765is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3766
3767If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3768section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3769to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3770alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3771contained within the output section.
3772
3773The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3774
3775@itemize @bullet
3776@item
3777If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3778is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3779in that region.
3780
3781@item
3782If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3783regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3784section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3785be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3786
3787@item
3788If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3789the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3790counter.
3791@end itemize
3792
3793@noindent
3794For example:
3795
252b5132
RH
3796@smallexample
3797.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3798@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3799
252b5132
RH
3800@noindent
3801and
ea5cae92 3802
252b5132
RH
3803@smallexample
3804.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3805@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3806
252b5132
RH
3807@noindent
3808are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3809@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3810counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3811counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3812input sections.
252b5132
RH
3813
3814The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3815For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3816so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3817do something like this:
3818@smallexample
3819.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3820@end smallexample
3821@noindent
3822This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3823aligned upward to the specified value.
3824
3825Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3826location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3827sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3828
3829@node Input Section
36f63dca 3830@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3831@cindex input sections
3832@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3833The most common output section command is an input section description.
3834
3835The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3836You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3837in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3838map the input files into your memory layout.
3839
3840@menu
3841* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3842* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3843* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3844* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3845* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3846@end menu
3847
3848@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3849@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3850@cindex input section basics
3851An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3852by a list of section names in parentheses.
3853
3854The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3855describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3856
3857The most common input section description is to include all input
3858sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3859include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3860@smallexample
3861*(.text)
3862@end smallexample
3863@noindent
18625d54
CM
3864Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3865of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3866match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3867example:
252b5132 3868@smallexample
b4346c09 3869*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3870@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3871will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3872@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3873
3874There are two ways to include more than one section:
3875@smallexample
3876*(.text .rdata)
3877*(.text) *(.rdata)
3878@end smallexample
3879@noindent
3880The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3881@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3882first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3883they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3884@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3885@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3886
3887You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3888You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3889needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3890@smallexample
3891data.o(.data)
3892@end smallexample
3893
ae17ab41
CM
3894To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3895of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3896
3897Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3898
3899@smallexample
3900@group
3901SECTIONS @{
3902 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3903 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3904@}
3905@end group
3906@end smallexample
3907
3908In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3909input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3910@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3911@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3912whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3913
967928e9
AM
3914You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3915matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3916with no whitespace around the colon.
3917
3918@table @samp
3919@item archive:file
3920matches file within archive
3921@item archive:
3922matches the whole archive
3923@item :file
3924matches file but not one in an archive
3925@end table
3926
3927Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3928wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3929single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3930@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3931within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3932also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3933other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3934from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3935command.
3936
252b5132
RH
3937If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3938the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3939commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3940@smallexample
3941data.o
3942@end smallexample
3943
967928e9
AM
3944When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3945and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3946characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3947name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3948did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3949though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3950@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3951the archive search path.
3952
3953@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3954@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3955@cindex input section wildcards
3956@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3957@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3958@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3959In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3960name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3961
3962The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3963pattern for the file name.
3964
3965The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3966
3967@table @samp
3968@item *
3969matches any number of characters
3970@item ?
3971matches any single character
3972@item [@var{chars}]
3973matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3974character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3975@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3976@item \
3977quotes the following character
3978@end table
3979
3980When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3981will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3982Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3983exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3984@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3985a @samp{/} character.
3986
3987File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3988specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3989does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3990
3991If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3992appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3993will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3994sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3995@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3996@smallexample
3997.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3998.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3999@end smallexample
4000
bcaa7b3e 4001@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4002Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4003in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4004this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4005pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4006@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4007into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4008
bcaa7b3e
L
4009@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4010@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4011difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4012ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4013
02ecc8e9
L
4014@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4015@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4016difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4017ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4018encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4019
bcaa7b3e
L
4020@cindex SORT
4021@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4022
4023When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4024can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4025
4026@enumerate
4027@item
4028@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4029It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
4030sections have the same name.
4031@item
4032@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4033It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
4034sections have the same alignment.
4035@item
c0065db7 4036@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4037treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4038@item
4039@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4040is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4041@item
4042All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4043@end enumerate
4044
4045When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4046section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4047takes precedence over the command line option.
4048
4049If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4050command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4051treated as nested sorting command.
4052
4053@enumerate
4054@item
4055@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4056@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4057@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4058@item
4059@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4060@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4061@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4062@end enumerate
4063
4064If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4065command line option will be ignored.
4066
eda680f8
L
4067@cindex SORT_NONE
4068@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4069section sorting option.
4070
252b5132
RH
4071If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4072@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4073precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4074
4075This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4076files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4077sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4078The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4079with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4080linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4081@smallexample
4082@group
4083SECTIONS @{
4084 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4085 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4086 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4087 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4088@}
4089@end group
4090@end smallexample
4091
4092@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4093@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4094@cindex common symbol placement
4095@cindex uninitialized data placement
4096A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4097file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4098linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4099named @samp{COMMON}.
4100
4101You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4102other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4103particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4104input files are placed in another section.
4105
4106In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4107@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4108@smallexample
4109.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4110@end smallexample
4111
4112@cindex scommon section
4113@cindex small common symbols
4114Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4115example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4116symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4117different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4118the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4119symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4120to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4121locations.
4122
4123@cindex [COMMON]
4124You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4125notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4126@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4127
4128@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4129@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4130@cindex KEEP
4131@cindex garbage collection
4132When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4133it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4134This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4135with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4136@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4137
4138@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4139@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4140The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4141to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4142start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4143@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4144follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4145@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4146@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4147All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4148files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4149
4150@smallexample
4151@group
4152SECTIONS @{
4153 outputa 0x10000 :
4154 @{
4155 all.o
4156 foo.o (.input1)
4157 @}
36f63dca
NC
4158@end group
4159@group
252b5132
RH
4160 outputb :
4161 @{
4162 foo.o (.input2)
4163 foo1.o (.input1)
4164 @}
36f63dca
NC
4165@end group
4166@group
252b5132
RH
4167 outputc :
4168 @{
4169 *(.input1)
4170 *(.input2)
4171 @}
4172@}
4173@end group
a1ab1d2a 4174@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4175
4176@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4177@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4178@cindex data
4179@cindex section data
4180@cindex output section data
4181@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4182@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4183@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4184@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4185@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4186You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4187@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4188an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4189parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4190value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4191counter.
4192
4193The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4194store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4195bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4196stored.
4197
4198For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4199of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4200@smallexample
4201BYTE(1)
4202LONG(addr)
4203@end smallexample
4204
4205When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4206same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4207target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4208@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4209@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4210
4211If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4212which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4213When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4214true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4215endianness of the first input object file.
4216
36f63dca 4217Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4218between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4219@smallexample
4220SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4221@end smallexample
4222whereas this will work:
4223@smallexample
4224SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4225@end smallexample
4226
252b5132
RH
4227@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4228@cindex holes, filling
4229@cindex unspecified memory
4230You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4231current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4232otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4233gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4234with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4235necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4236point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4237than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4238different parts of an output section.
4239
4240This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4241value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4242@smallexample
563e308f 4243FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4244@end smallexample
4245
4246The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4247section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4248part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4249entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4250precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4251expression.
252b5132
RH
4252
4253@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4254@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4255There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4256commands.
4257
4258@table @code
4259@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4260@cindex input filename symbols
4261@cindex filename symbols
4262@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4263The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4264The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4265file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4266the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4267
4268This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4269normally used for any other object file format.
4270
4271@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4272@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4273@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4274@item CONSTRUCTORS
4275When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4276unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4277destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4278arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4279automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4280For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4281linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4282@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4283ignored for other object file formats.
4284
4285The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4286constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4287Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4288the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4289first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4290of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4291compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4292formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4293@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4294the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4295destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4296@code{exit}.
4297
4298For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4299arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4300addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4301and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4302linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4303runtime code expects to see.
4304
4305@smallexample
4306 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4307 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4308 *(.ctors)
4309 LONG(0)
4310 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4311 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4312 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4313 *(.dtors)
4314 LONG(0)
4315 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4316@end smallexample
4317
4318If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4319which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4320are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4321are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4322command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4323@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4324@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4325@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4326
4327Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4328and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4329need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4330scripts.
4331
4332@end table
4333
4334@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4335@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4336@cindex discarding sections
4337@cindex sections, discarding
4338@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4339The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4340for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4341be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4342@smallexample
49c13adb 4343.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4344@end smallexample
4345@noindent
4346will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4347@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4348sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4349space in an output section will also create the output section.
4350
a0976ea4 4351The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4352on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4353symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4354the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4355section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4356
4357@cindex /DISCARD/
4358The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4359input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4360section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4361
4362@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4363@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4364@cindex output section attributes
4365We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4366like this:
0c71d759 4367
252b5132 4368@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4369@group
7e7d5768 4370@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4371 [AT(@var{lma})]
4372 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4373 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4374 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4375 @{
4376 @var{output-section-command}
4377 @var{output-section-command}
4378 @dots{}
562d3460 4379 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4380@end group
4381@end smallexample
0c71d759 4382
252b5132
RH
4383We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4384@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4385remaining section attributes.
4386
a1ab1d2a 4387@menu
252b5132
RH
4388* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4389* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4390* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4391* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4392* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4393* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4394* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4395* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4396@end menu
4397
4398@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4399@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4400Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4401parentheses. The following types are defined:
4402
4403@table @code
4404@item NOLOAD
4405The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4406loaded into memory when the program is run.
4407@item DSECT
4408@itemx COPY
4409@itemx INFO
4410@itemx OVERLAY
4411These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4412rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4413marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4414section when the program is run.
4415@end table
4416
4417@kindex NOLOAD
4418@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4419@cindex loading, preventing
4420The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4421the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4422the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4423@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4424need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4425@smallexample
4426@group
4427SECTIONS @{
4428 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4429 @dots{}
4430@}
4431@end group
4432@end smallexample
4433
4434@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4435@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4436@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4437@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4438@cindex load address
4439@cindex section load address
4440Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4441@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4442@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4443specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4444address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4445
ea5cae92
NC
4446The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4447specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4448takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4449load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4450region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4451
4452If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4453section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4454load address:
4455
4456@itemize @bullet
4457@item
4458If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4459the LMA address as well.
4460
4461@item
4462If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4463
4464@item
4465Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4466with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4467section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4468VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4469the last section in the located region.
4470
4471@item
4472If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4473that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4474
4475@item
4476If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4477section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4478@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4479
4480@cindex ROM initialized data
4481@cindex initialized data in ROM
4482This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4483example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4484called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4485@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4486even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4487uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4488defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4489counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4490
4491@smallexample
4492@group
4493SECTIONS
4494 @{
4495 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4496 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4497 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4498 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4499 .bss 0x3000 :
4500 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4501@}
4502@end group
4503@end smallexample
4504
4505The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4506this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4507the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4508how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4509script.
4510
4511@smallexample
4512@group
4513extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4514char *src = &_etext;
4515char *dst = &_data;
4516
ea5cae92
NC
4517/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4518while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4519 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4520
ea5cae92 4521/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4522for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4523 *dst = 0;
4524@end group
4525@end smallexample
4526
bbf115d3
L
4527@node Forced Output Alignment
4528@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4529@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4530@cindex forcing output section alignment
4531@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4532You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4533
7e7d5768
AM
4534@node Forced Input Alignment
4535@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4536@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4537@cindex forcing input section alignment
4538@cindex input section alignment
4539You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4540SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4541sections, whether larger or smaller.
4542
0c71d759
NC
4543@node Output Section Constraint
4544@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4545@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4546@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4547@cindex constraints on output sections
4548You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4549of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4550read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4551@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4552
252b5132 4553@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4554@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4555@kindex >@var{region}
4556@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4557@cindex memory regions and sections
4558You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4559using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4560
4561Here is a simple example:
4562@smallexample
4563@group
4564MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4565SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4566@end group
4567@end smallexample
4568
4569@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4570@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4571@kindex :@var{phdr}
4572@cindex section, assigning to program header
4573@cindex program headers and sections
4574You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4575using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4576one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4577assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4578@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4579linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4580
4581Here is a simple example:
4582@smallexample
4583@group
4584PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4585SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4586@end group
4587@end smallexample
4588
4589@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4590@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4591@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4592@cindex section fill pattern
4593@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4594You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4595@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4596(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4597within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4598alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4599necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4600of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4601an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4602fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4603other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4604pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4605expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4606
4607You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4608output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4609
4610Here is a simple example:
4611@smallexample
4612@group
563e308f 4613SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4614@end group
4615@end smallexample
4616
4617@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4618@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4619@kindex OVERLAY
4620@cindex overlays
4621An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4622are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4623the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4624copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4625required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4626can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4627than another.
4628
4629Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4630@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4631output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4632command is as follows:
4633@smallexample
4634@group
4635OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4636 @{
4637 @var{secname1}
4638 @{
4639 @var{output-section-command}
4640 @var{output-section-command}
4641 @dots{}
4642 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4643 @var{secname2}
4644 @{
4645 @var{output-section-command}
4646 @var{output-section-command}
4647 @dots{}
4648 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4649 @dots{}
4650 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4651@end group
4652@end smallexample
4653
4654Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4655section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4656section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4657those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4658except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4659sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4660
4661The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4662addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4663memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4664whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4665and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4666and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4667
4668If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4669among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4670all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4671section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4672NOCROSSREFS}.
4673
4674For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4675provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4676defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4677@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4678the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4679within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4680symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4681
4682At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4683the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4684
4685Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4686@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4687@smallexample
4688@group
4689 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4690 @{
4691 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4692 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4693 @}
4694@end group
4695@end smallexample
4696@noindent
4697This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4698address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4699@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4700following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4701@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4702@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4703
4704C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4705like the following.
4706
4707@smallexample
4708@group
4709 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4710 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4711 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4712@end group
4713@end smallexample
4714
4715Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4716everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4717example could have been written identically as follows.
4718
4719@smallexample
4720@group
4721 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4722 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4723 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4724 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4725 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4726 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4727 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4728@end group
4729@end smallexample
4730
4731@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4732@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4733@kindex MEMORY
4734@cindex memory regions
4735@cindex regions of memory
4736@cindex allocating memory
4737@cindex discontinuous memory
4738The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4739memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4740
4741The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4742memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4743may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4744can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4745set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4746regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4747around to fit into the available regions.
4748
4749A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4750command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4751you wish. The syntax is:
4752@smallexample
4753@group
a1ab1d2a 4754MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4755 @{
4756 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4757 @dots{}
4758 @}
4759@end group
4760@end smallexample
4761
4762The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4763region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4764Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4765with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4766must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4767add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4768command.
252b5132
RH
4769
4770@cindex memory region attributes
4771The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4772whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4773not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4774@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4775section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4776the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4777them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4778
4779The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4780@table @samp
4781@item R
4782Read-only section
4783@item W
4784Read/write section
4785@item X
4786Executable section
4787@item A
4788Allocatable section
4789@item I
4790Initialized section
4791@item L
4792Same as @samp{I}
4793@item !
c09e9a8c 4794Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4795@end table
4796
4797If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4798@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4799attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4800in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4801attributes.
4802
4803@kindex ORIGIN =
4804@kindex o =
4805@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4806The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4807the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4808cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4809abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4810@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4811
4812@kindex LENGTH =
4813@kindex len =
4814@kindex l =
4815The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4816region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4817be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4818@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4819
4820In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4821available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4822and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4823linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4824is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4825or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4826explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4827region.
4828
4829@smallexample
4830@group
a1ab1d2a 4831MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4832 @{
4833 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4834 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4835 @}
4836@end group
4837@end smallexample
4838
4839Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4840specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4841@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4842a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4843output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4844was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4845the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4846output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4847region, the linker will issue an error message.
4848
3ec57632 4849It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4850expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4851@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4852
4853@smallexample
4854@group
c0065db7 4855 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4856@end group
4857@end smallexample
4858
252b5132
RH
4859@node PHDRS
4860@section PHDRS Command
4861@kindex PHDRS
4862@cindex program headers
4863@cindex ELF program headers
4864@cindex program segments
4865@cindex segments, ELF
4866The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4867@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4868loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4869program with the @samp{-p} option.
4870
4871When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4872reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4873program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4874This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4875interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4876
4877The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4878in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4879precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4880the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4881not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4882
4883The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4884generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4885ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4886
4887This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4888@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4889
4890@smallexample
4891@group
4892PHDRS
4893@{
4894 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4895 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4896@}
4897@end group
4898@end smallexample
4899
4900The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4901of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4902header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4903with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4904must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4905is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4906
4907Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4908system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4909specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4910sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4911attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4912Section Phdr}.
4913
4914It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4915merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4916repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4917contain the section.
4918
4919If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4920then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4921not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4922convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4923placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4924default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4925segment at all.
4926
4927@kindex FILEHDR
4928@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4929You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4930the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4931The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4932file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4933include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4934segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4935these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4936
4937The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4938value of the keyword.
4939
4940@table @asis
4941@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4942Indicates an unused program header.
4943
4944@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4945Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4946the file.
4947
4948@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4949Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4950
4951@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4952Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4953found.
4954
4955@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4956Indicates a segment holding note information.
4957
4958@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4959A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4960ABI.
4961
4962@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4963Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4964
4965@item @var{expression}
4966An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4967be used for types not defined above.
4968@end table
4969
4970You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4971in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4972@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4973Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4974output section attribute.
4975
4976The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4977which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4978explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4979an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4980header.
4981
4982Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4983headers used on a native ELF system.
4984
4985@example
4986@group
4987PHDRS
4988@{
4989 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4990 interp PT_INTERP ;
4991 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4992 data PT_LOAD ;
4993 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4994@}
4995
4996SECTIONS
4997@{
4998 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4999 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5000 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5001 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5002 @dots{}
5003 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5004 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5005 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5006 @dots{}
5007@}
5008@end group
5009@end example
5010
5011@node VERSION
5012@section VERSION Command
5013@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5014@cindex symbol versions
5015@cindex version script
5016@cindex versions of symbols
5017The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5018only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5019symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5020a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5021shared library.
5022
5023You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5024you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5025also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5026
5027The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5028@smallexample
5029VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5030@end smallexample
5031
5032The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5033Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5034version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5035version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5036version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5037scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5038library.
5039
5040The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5041examples.
5042
5043@smallexample
5044VERS_1.1 @{
5045 global:
5046 foo1;
5047 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5048 old*;
5049 original*;
5050 new*;
252b5132
RH
5051@};
5052
5053VERS_1.2 @{
5054 foo2;
5055@} VERS_1.1;
5056
5057VERS_2.0 @{
5058 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5059 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5060 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5061 "f(int, double)";
5062 @};
252b5132
RH
5063@} VERS_1.2;
5064@end smallexample
5065
5066This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5067version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5068The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5069a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5070of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5071symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5072is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5073in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5074However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5075name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5076
5077Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5078depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5079to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5080
5081Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5082depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5083and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5084
5085When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5086specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5087unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5088unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5089somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5090wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5091wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5092set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5093ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5094
5095The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5096they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5097could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5098However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5099
0f6bf451 5100Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5101in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5102symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5103won't.
5104
5105@smallexample
7c9c73be 5106@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5107@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5108
252b5132
RH
5109When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5110symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5111requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5112shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5113loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5114linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5115application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5116way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5117all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5118search for each symbol reference.
5119
5120The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5121doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5122that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5123functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5124the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5125required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5126that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5127versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5128the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5129
5130There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5131first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5132source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5133script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5134maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5135@smallexample
5136__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5137@end smallexample
5138@noindent
5139in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5140be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5141The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5142@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5143takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5144
5145The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5146function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5147an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5148version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5149linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5150
5151To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5152source file. Here is an example:
5153
5154@smallexample
5155__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5156__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5157__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5158__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5159@end smallexample
5160
5161In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5162unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5163example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5164@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5165
5166When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5167some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5168this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5169@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5170declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5171you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5172
5173If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5174within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5175(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5176specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5177
cb840a31
L
5178You can also specify the language in the version script:
5179
5180@smallexample
5181VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5182@end smallexample
5183
c0065db7 5184The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5185The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5186demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5187patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5188@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5189
86043bbb
MM
5190Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5191described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5192or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5193the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5194whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5195cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5196might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5197should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5198expect when you upgrade.
5199
252b5132
RH
5200@node Expressions
5201@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5202@cindex expressions
5203@cindex arithmetic
5204The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5205that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5206expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5207host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5208
5209You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5210
5211The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5212expressions.
5213
5214@menu
5215* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5216* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5217* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5218* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5219* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5220* Operators:: Operators
5221* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5222* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5223* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5224@end menu
5225
5226@node Constants
5227@subsection Constants
5228@cindex integer notation
5229@cindex constants in linker scripts
5230All constants are integers.
5231
5232As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5233octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5234hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5235@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5236@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5237value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5238
5239@cindex scaled integers
5240@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5241@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5242@cindex suffixes for integers
5243@cindex integer suffixes
5244In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5245constant by
5246@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5247@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5248@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5249@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5250@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5251@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5252@tex
5253${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5254@end tex
5255@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5256respectively. For example, the following
5257all refer to the same quantity:
5258
252b5132 5259@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5260_fourk_1 = 4K;
5261_fourk_2 = 4096;
5262_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5263_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5264@end smallexample
5265
8a308ae8
NC
5266Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5267conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5268
0c71d759
NC
5269@node Symbolic Constants
5270@subsection Symbolic Constants
5271@cindex symbolic constants
5272@kindex CONSTANT
5273It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5274the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5275
5276@table @code
5277@item MAXPAGESIZE
5278@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5279The target's maximum page size.
5280
5281@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5282@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5283The target's default page size.
5284@end table
5285
5286So for example:
5287
5288@smallexample
5289 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5290@end smallexample
5291
5292will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5293supported by the target.
5294
252b5132
RH
5295@node Symbols
5296@subsection Symbol Names
5297@cindex symbol names
5298@cindex names
5299@cindex quoted symbol names
5300@kindex "
5301Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5302and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5303Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5304specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5305keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5306@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5307"SECTION" = 9;
5308"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5309@end smallexample
5310
5311Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5312to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5313whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5314
ecca9871
L
5315@node Orphan Sections
5316@subsection Orphan Sections
5317@cindex orphan
5318Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5319are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5320script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5321output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5322placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5323attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5324same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5325If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5326at the end of the file.
5327
5328For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5329well as section flag.
5330
41911f68 5331If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5332the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5333__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5334section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5335orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5336representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5337character.
5338
252b5132
RH
5339@node Location Counter
5340@subsection The Location Counter
5341@kindex .
5342@cindex dot
5343@cindex location counter
5344@cindex current output location
5345The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5346current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5347location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5348within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5349anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5350
5351@cindex holes
5352Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5353moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5354location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5355and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5356doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5357
5358@smallexample
5359SECTIONS
5360@{
5361 output :
5362 @{
5363 file1(.text)
5364 . = . + 1000;
5365 file2(.text)
5366 . += 1000;
5367 file3(.text)
563e308f 5368 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5369@}
5370@end smallexample
5371@noindent
5372In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5373located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5374followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5375@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5376@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5377specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5378
5c6bbab8
NC
5379@cindex dot inside sections
5380Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5381current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5382statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5383absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5384however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5385not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5386
5387@smallexample
5388SECTIONS
5389@{
5390 . = 0x100
5391 .text: @{
5392 *(.text)
5393 . = 0x200
5394 @}
5395 . = 0x500
5396 .data: @{
5397 *(.data)
5398 . += 0x600
5399 @}
5400@}
5401@end smallexample
5402
5403The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5404and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5405the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5406much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5407move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5408and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5409the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5410the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5411
b5666f2f
AM
5412@cindex dot outside sections
5413Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5414output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5415needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5416
5417@smallexample
5418SECTIONS
5419@{
5420 start_of_text = . ;
5421 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5422 end_of_text = . ;
5423
5424 start_of_data = . ;
5425 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5426 end_of_data = . ;
5427@}
5428@end smallexample
5429
5430If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5431not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5432between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5433should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5434blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5435the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5436sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5437statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5438special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5439place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5440as follows:
5441
5442@smallexample
5443SECTIONS
5444@{
5445 start_of_text = . ;
5446 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5447 end_of_text = . ;
5448
5449 start_of_data = . ;
5450 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5451 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5452 end_of_data = . ;
5453@}
5454@end smallexample
5455
5456This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5457@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5458placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5459assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5460a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5461section. So you could write:
5462
5463@smallexample
5464SECTIONS
5465@{
5466 start_of_text = . ;
5467 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5468 end_of_text = . ;
5469
5470 . = . ;
5471 start_of_data = . ;
5472 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5473 end_of_data = . ;
5474@}
5475@end smallexample
5476
5477Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5478@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5479
252b5132
RH
5480@need 2000
5481@node Operators
5482@subsection Operators
5483@cindex operators for arithmetic
5484@cindex arithmetic operators
5485@cindex precedence in expressions
5486The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5487the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5488@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5489@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5490@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5491@smallexample
5492precedence associativity Operators Notes
5493(highest)
54941 left ! - ~ (1)
54952 left * / %
54963 left + -
54974 left >> <<
54985 left == != > < <= >=
54996 left &
55007 left |
55018 left &&
55029 left ||
550310 right ? :
550411 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5505(lowest)
5506@end smallexample
5507Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5508(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5509(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5510@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5511@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5512@tex
5513\vskip \baselineskip
5514%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5515\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5516\hrule
5517\halign
5518{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5519height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5520&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5521height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5522\noalign{\hrule}
5523height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5524&highest&&&&&\cr
5525% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5526&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5527&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5528&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5529&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5530&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5531&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5532&7&&left&&|&\cr
5533&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5534&9&&left&&||&\cr
5535&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5536&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5537&lowest&&&&&\cr
5538height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5539\hrule}
5540@end tex
5541@iftex
5542{
5543@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5544@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5545@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5546}
5547@end iftex
5548@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5549
5550@node Evaluation
5551@subsection Evaluation
5552@cindex lazy evaluation
5553@cindex expression evaluation order
5554The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5555an expression when absolutely necessary.
5556
5557The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5558address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5559regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5560as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5561
5562However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5563until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5564other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5565for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5566
5567The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5568assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5569allocation.
5570
5571Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5572@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5573
5574If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5575available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5576following
5577@smallexample
5578@group
5579SECTIONS
5580 @{
a1ab1d2a 5581 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5582 @{ *(.text) @}
5583 @}
5584@end group
5585@end smallexample
5586@noindent
5587will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5588address}.
5589
5590@node Expression Section
5591@subsection The Section of an Expression
5592@cindex expression sections
5593@cindex absolute expressions
5594@cindex relative expressions
5595@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5596@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5597@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5598Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5599relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5600using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5601value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5602symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5603operations.
5604
abf4be64
AM
5605Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5606section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5607address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5608@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5609functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5610One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5611(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5612differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5613versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5614section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5615Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5616absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5617given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5618everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5619
5620In the following simple example,
252b5132 5621
7542af2a
AM
5622@smallexample
5623@group
5624SECTIONS
5625 @{
5626 . = 0x100;
5627 __executable_start = 0x100;
5628 .data :
5629 @{
5630 . = 0x10;
5631 __data_start = 0x10;
5632 *(.data)
5633 @}
5634 @dots{}
5635 @}
5636@end group
5637@end smallexample
252b5132 5638
7542af2a
AM
5639both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5640address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5641@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5642section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5643
5c3049d2
AM
5644For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5645addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5646
5647@itemize @bullet
5648@item
5649Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5650relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5651and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5652@item
5653Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5654or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5655same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5656address before applying the operator.
5657@end itemize
5658
5659The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5660
5661@itemize @bullet
5662@item
5663An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5664@item
5665The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5666@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5667The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5668relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5669(after above conversions) is also a number.
5670@item
5671The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5672relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5673section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5674@item
5675The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5676conversions) is an absolute address.
5677@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5678
5679You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5680to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5681create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5682section @samp{.data}:
5683@smallexample
5684SECTIONS
5685 @{
5686 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5687 @}
5688@end smallexample
5689@noindent
5690If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5691@samp{.data} section.
5692
7542af2a
AM
5693Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5694particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5695
252b5132
RH
5696@node Builtin Functions
5697@subsection Builtin Functions
5698@cindex functions in expressions
5699The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5700use in linker script expressions.
5701
5702@table @code
5703@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5704@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5705@cindex expression, absolute
5706Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5707of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5708value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5709normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5710
5711@item ADDR(@var{section})
5712@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5713@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5714Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5715script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5716the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5717@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5718@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5719the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5720@smallexample
5721@group
5722SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5723 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5724 @{
252b5132
RH
5725 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5726 @dots{}
5727 @}
5728 .output :
5729 @{
5730 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5731 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5732 @}
5733@dots{} @}
5734@end group
5735@end smallexample
5736
876f4090
NS
5737@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5738@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5739@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5740@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5741@cindex round up location counter
5742@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5743@cindex round up expression
5744@cindex align expression
5745Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5746to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5747doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5748arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5749expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5750equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5751
5752Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5753next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5754variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5755input sections:
252b5132
RH
5756@smallexample
5757@group
5758SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5759 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5760 *(.data)
5761 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5762 @}
5763@dots{} @}
5764@end group
5765@end smallexample
5766@noindent
5767The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5768a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5769a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5770of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5771
5772The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5773
362c1d1a
NS
5774@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5775@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5776@cindex section alignment
5777Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5778been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5779evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5780the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5781value in that section.
5782@smallexample
5783@group
5784SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5785 .output @{
5786 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5787 @dots{}
5788 @}
5789@dots{} @}
5790@end group
5791@end smallexample
5792
252b5132
RH
5793@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5794@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5795This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5796scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5797section.
5798
2d20f7bf
JJ
5799@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5800@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5801This is equivalent to either
5802@smallexample
5803(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5804@end smallexample
5805or
5806@smallexample
5807(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5808@end smallexample
5809@noindent
5810depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5811for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5812@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5813If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5814memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5815bytes in the on-disk file.
5816
5817This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5818any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5819@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5820be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5821working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5822
5823@noindent
5824Example:
5825@smallexample
5826 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5827@end smallexample
5828
5829@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5830@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5831This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5832evaluation purposes.
5833
5834@smallexample
5835 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5836@end smallexample
5837
a4f5ad88
JJ
5838@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5839@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5840This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5841@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5842When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5843does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5844@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5845boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5846it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5847@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5848
5849@smallexample
5850 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5851@end smallexample
5852
252b5132
RH
5853@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5854@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5855@cindex symbol defaults
5856Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5857defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5858return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5859default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5860shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5861the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5862existed, its value is preserved:
5863
5864@smallexample
5865@group
5866SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5867 .text : @{
5868 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5869 @dots{}
5870 @}
5871 @dots{}
5872@}
5873@end group
5874@end smallexample
5875
3ec57632
NC
5876@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5877@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5878Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5879
252b5132
RH
5880@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5881@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5882@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5883Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5884Section LMA}).
5885
5886@kindex MAX
5887@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5888Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5889
5890@kindex MIN
5891@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5892Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5893
5894@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5895@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5896@cindex unallocated address, next
5897Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5898This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5899use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5900output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5901
3ec57632
NC
5902@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5903@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5904Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5905
ba916c8a
MM
5906@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5907@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5908Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5909value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5910option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5911@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5912be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5913``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5914name.
5915
252b5132
RH
5916@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5917@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5918@cindex section size
5919Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5920been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5921evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5922@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5923@smallexample
5924@group
5925SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5926 .output @{
5927 .start = . ;
5928 @dots{}
5929 .end = . ;
5930 @}
5931 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5932 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5933@dots{} @}
5934@end group
5935@end smallexample
5936
5937@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5938@itemx sizeof_headers
5939@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5940@cindex header size
5941Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5942information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5943this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5944choose, to facilitate paging.
5945
5946@cindex not enough room for program headers
5947@cindex program headers, not enough room
5948When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5949@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5950number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5951addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5952additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5953room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5954the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5955script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5956you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5957command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5958@end table
5959
5960@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5961@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5962@cindex implicit linker scripts
5963If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5964an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5965linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5966linker will report an error.
5967
5968An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5969
5970Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5971assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5972commands.
5973
5974Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5975at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5976read. This can affect archive searching.
5977
5978@ifset GENERIC
5979@node Machine Dependent
5980@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5981
5982@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5983@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5984sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5985functionality are not listed.
5986
5987@menu
36f63dca
NC
5988@ifset H8300
5989* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5990@end ifset
5991@ifset I960
5992* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5993@end ifset
5994@ifset ARM
5995* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5996@end ifset
5997@ifset HPPA
5998* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5999@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6000@ifset M68K
6001* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6002@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6003@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6004* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6005@end ifset
2469cfa2 6006@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6007* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6008@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
6009@ifset M68HC11
6010* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6011@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6012@ifset POWERPC
6013* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6014@end ifset
6015@ifset POWERPC64
6016* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6017@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6018@ifset SPU
6019* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6020@end ifset
74459f0e 6021@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6022* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6023@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6024@ifset WIN32
6025* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6026@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6027@ifset XTENSA
6028* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6029@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6030@end menu
6031@end ifset
6032
252b5132
RH
6033@ifset H8300
6034@ifclear GENERIC
6035@raisesections
6036@end ifclear
6037
6038@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6039@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6040
6041@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6042For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6043you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6044
6045@table @emph
6046@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6047@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6048@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6049targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6050program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6051respectively.
6052
6053@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6054@item synthesizing instructions
6055@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 6056@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6057sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6058page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6059(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6060@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6061top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
6062
6063@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6064@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6065biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6066which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6067page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6068(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6069@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6070the top page of memory).
6071
6072@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6073@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
607432 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6075changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6076(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6077@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6078the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6079@end table
6080
6081@ifclear GENERIC
6082@lowersections
6083@end ifclear
6084@end ifset
6085
36f63dca 6086@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6087@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6088@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6089@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6090@node Renesas
6091@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6092
c2dcd04e
NC
6093@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6094H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6095options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6096@end ifset
6097@end ifclear
6098
6099@ifset I960
6100@ifclear GENERIC
6101@raisesections
6102@end ifclear
6103
6104@node i960
6105@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6106
6107@cindex i960 support
6108
6109You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6110specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6111family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6112incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6113linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6114libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6115search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6116
6117For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6118well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6119paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6120the names
6121
6122@smallexample
6123@group
6124try
6125libtry.a
6126tryca
6127libtryca.a
6128@end group
6129@end smallexample
6130
6131@noindent
6132The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6133two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6134
6135You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6136the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6137use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6138specifies a library.
6139
6140@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6141@cindex relaxing on i960
6142@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6143you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6144@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6145them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6146instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6147instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6148target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6149not itself call any subroutines).
6150
48229727
JB
6151@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6152@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6153@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6154The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6155
6156The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6157
85fdf906
AH
6158@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6159@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6160The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6161
36f63dca
NC
6162@ifclear GENERIC
6163@lowersections
6164@end ifclear
6165@end ifset
6166
6167@ifset ARM
6168@ifclear GENERIC
6169@raisesections
6170@end ifclear
6171
93fd0973
SC
6172@ifset M68HC11
6173@ifclear GENERIC
6174@raisesections
6175@end ifclear
6176
6177@node M68HC11/68HC12
6178@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6179
6180@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6181
6182@subsection Linker Relaxation
6183
6184For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6185optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6186
6187@table @emph
6188@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6189@item relaxing address modes
6190@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6191targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6192program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6193respectively.
6194
6195@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6196transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6197page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6198
6199@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6200When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6201of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6202addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6203@code{bset} instructions.
6204
6205@end table
6206
6207@subsection Trampoline Generation
6208
6209@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6210@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6211For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6212call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6213will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6214trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6215case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6216point to the function trampoline.
6217
6218@ifclear GENERIC
6219@lowersections
6220@end ifclear
6221@end ifset
6222
36f63dca 6223@node ARM
3674e28a 6224@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6225
6226@cindex ARM interworking support
6227@kindex --support-old-code
6228For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6229between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6230been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6231line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6232libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6233option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6234given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6235which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6236the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6237non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6238
6239@cindex thumb entry point
6240@cindex entry point, thumb
6241@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6242The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6243@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6244But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6245branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6246executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6247
ce11ba6c
KT
6248@cindex PE import table prefixing
6249@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6250The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6251the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6252elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6253import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6254
e489d0ae
PB
6255@cindex BE8
6256@kindex --be8
6257The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6258executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6259The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6260
3674e28a
PB
6261@cindex TARGET1
6262@kindex --target1-rel
6263@kindex --target1-abs
6264The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6265@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6266or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6267and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6268
6269@cindex TARGET2
6270@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6271The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6272@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6273meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6274@table @samp
6275@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6276@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6277@item abs
6278@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6279@item got-rel
6280@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6281@end table
6282
319850b4
JB
6283@cindex FIX_V4BX
6284@kindex --fix-v4bx
6285The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6286specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6287interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6288also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6289
6290In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6291linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6292@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6293
6294In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6295relocations are ignored.
6296
845b51d6
PB
6297@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6298@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6299Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6300relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6301
6302@smallexample
6303TST rM, #1
6304MOVEQ PC, rM
6305BX Rn
6306@end smallexample
6307
6308This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6309and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6310condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6311
33bfe774
JB
6312@cindex USE_BLX
6313@kindex --use-blx
6314The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6315BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6316situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6317code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6318each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6319
6320This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6321specify it if you are using that target.
6322
c6dd86c6
JB
6323@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6324@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6325The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6326bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6327instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6328to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6329the support code can read the intended values.
6330
6331The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6332intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6333and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6334intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6335full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6336you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6337
6338If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6339enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6340@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6341mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6342vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6343@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6344
6345If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6346potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6347such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6348first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6349instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6350the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6351are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6352
2de70689
MGD
6353@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6354@kindex --fix-arm1176
6355@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6356The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6357in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6358are targetting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6359unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6360
6361Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6362Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentaion website at:
6363http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6364
bf21ed78
MS
6365@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6366@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6367The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6368warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6369enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6370linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6371using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6372not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6373
6374@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6375@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6376The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6377warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6378@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6379linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6380using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6381
726150b7
NC
6382@cindex PIC_VENEER
6383@kindex --pic-veneer
6384The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6385ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6386is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6387@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6388
6389@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6390@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6391The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6392code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6393perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6394placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6395controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6396The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6397duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6398group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6399code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6400where they should be placed.
6401
6402The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6403@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6404placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6405branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6406placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6407value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6408exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6409A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6410linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6411from the input sections.
6412
6413The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6414@samp{N = +1}.
6415
1a51c1a4
NC
6416Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6417only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6418otherwise.
6419
36f63dca
NC
6420@ifclear GENERIC
6421@lowersections
6422@end ifclear
6423@end ifset
6424
6425@ifset HPPA
6426@ifclear GENERIC
6427@raisesections
6428@end ifclear
6429
6430@node HPPA ELF32
6431@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6432@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6433@kindex --multi-subspace
6434When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6435import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6436The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6437stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6438multiple sub-spaces.
6439
6440@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6441@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6442Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6443stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6444@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6445sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6446a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6447the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6448conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6449prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6450A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6451branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6452@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6453@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6454detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6455positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6456
6457Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6458single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6459create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6460large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6461
6462@ifclear GENERIC
6463@lowersections
6464@end ifclear
6465@end ifset
6466
7fb9f789
NC
6467@ifset M68K
6468@ifclear GENERIC
6469@raisesections
6470@end ifclear
6471
6472@node M68K
6473@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6474
6475@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6476@kindex --got=@var{type}
6477The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6478The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6479@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6480the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6481@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6482entries only at non-negative offsets.
6483@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6484entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6485support such GOTs.
6486@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6487output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6488file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6489files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6490
6491@ifclear GENERIC
6492@lowersections
6493@end ifclear
6494@end ifset
6495
36f63dca
NC
6496@ifset MMIX
6497@ifclear GENERIC
6498@raisesections
6499@end ifclear
6500
6501@node MMIX
6502@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6503For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6504@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6505understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6506can translate between the two formats.
6507
6508There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6509Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6510registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6511equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6512@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6513global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6514this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6515symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6516
7a2de473
HPN
6517Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6518@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6519The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6520of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6521
6522Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6523are left out from an mmo file.
6524
6525@ifclear GENERIC
6526@lowersections
6527@end ifclear
6528@end ifset
6529
6530@ifset MSP430
6531@ifclear GENERIC
6532@raisesections
6533@end ifclear
6534
6535@node MSP430
6536@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6537For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6538will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6539just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6540
6541@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6542The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6543
6544@table @code
6545@item @samp{.vectors}
6546Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6547
6548@item @samp{.bootloader}
6549Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6550in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6551
6552@item @samp{.infomem}
6553Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6554this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6555
c0065db7 6556@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6557This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6558in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6559
6560@item @samp{.noinit}
6561Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6562
c0065db7 6563The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6564@end table
6565
6566@ifclear GENERIC
6567@lowersections
6568@end ifclear
6569@end ifset
6570
2a60a7a8
AM
6571@ifset POWERPC
6572@ifclear GENERIC
6573@raisesections
6574@end ifclear
6575
6576@node PowerPC ELF32
6577@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6578@cindex PowerPC long branches
6579@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6580Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6581displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6582@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6583@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6584the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6585section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6586section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6587@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6588both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6589considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6590
6591@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6592@table @option
6593@cindex PowerPC PLT
6594@kindex --bss-plt
6595@item --bss-plt
6596Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6597generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6598the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6599writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6600@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6601PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6602compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6603BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6604
016687f8
AM
6605@kindex --secure-plt
6606@item --secure-plt
6607@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6608@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6609when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6610layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6611style BSS PLT.
6612
2a60a7a8
AM
6613@cindex PowerPC GOT
6614@kindex --sdata-got
6615@item --sdata-got
6616The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6617sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6618@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6619section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6620@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6621@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6622@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6623@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6624PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6625pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6626GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6627really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6628
6629@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6630@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6631@item --emit-stub-syms
6632This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6633symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6634
6635@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6636@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6637@item --no-tls-optimize
6638PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6639sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6640disable the optimization.
6641@end table
6642
6643@ifclear GENERIC
6644@lowersections
6645@end ifclear
6646@end ifset
6647
6648@ifset POWERPC64
6649@ifclear GENERIC
6650@raisesections
6651@end ifclear
6652
6653@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6654@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6655
6656@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6657@table @option
6658@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6659@kindex --stub-group-size
6660@item --stub-group-size
6661Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6662by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6663@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6664sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6665a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6666the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6667conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6668prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6669A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6670branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6671@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6672@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6673detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6674positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6675
6676Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6677single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6678create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6679large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6680
6681@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6682@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6683@item --emit-stub-syms
6684This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6685symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6686
6687@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6688@kindex --dotsyms
6689@kindex --no-dotsyms
6690@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6691These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6692in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6693function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6694code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6695properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6696to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6697@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6698dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6699feature.
6700
6701@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6702@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6703@item --no-tls-optimize
6704PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6705sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6706disable the optimization.
6707
6708@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6709@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6710@item --no-opd-optimize
6711PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6712corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6713the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6714Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6715
6716@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6717@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6718@item --non-overlapping-opd
6719Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6720@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6721the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6722entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6723
6724@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6725@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6726@item --no-toc-optimize
6727PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6728entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6729reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6730marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6731marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6732relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6733unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6734reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6735discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6736reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6737code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6738optimization.
6739
6740@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6741@kindex --no-multi-toc
6742@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6743If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6744@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6745where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6746entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6747total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6748grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6749TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6750calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6751help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
675264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6753Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6754
6755@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6756@kindex --no-toc-sort
6757@item --no-toc-sort
6758By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6759happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6760placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6761with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6762referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6763@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6764results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6765off this feature.
6766
6767@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6768@kindex --plt-align
6769@kindex --no-plt-align
6770@item --plt-align
6771@itemx --no-plt-align
6772Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6773aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6774boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6775are packed tightly.
6776
6777@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6778@kindex --plt-static-chain
6779@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6780@item --plt-static-chain
6781@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6782Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6783chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6784chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6785
6786@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6787@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6788@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6789@item --plt-thread-safe
6790@itemx --no-thread-safe
6791With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6792lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6793another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6794order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6795memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6796barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6797looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6798seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6799default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6800@end table
6801
6802@ifclear GENERIC
6803@lowersections
6804@end ifclear
6805@end ifset
6806
49fa1e15
AM
6807@ifset SPU
6808@ifclear GENERIC
6809@raisesections
6810@end ifclear
6811
6812@node SPU ELF
6813@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6814
6815@cindex SPU ELF options
6816@table @option
6817
6818@cindex SPU plugins
6819@kindex --plugin
6820@item --plugin
6821This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6822
6823@cindex SPU overlays
6824@kindex --no-overlays
6825@item --no-overlays
6826Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6827regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6828@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6829turns off all this special overlay handling.
6830
6831@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6832@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6833@item --emit-stub-syms
6834This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6835symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6836
6837@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6838@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6839@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6840This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6841function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6842on calls to non-overlay regions.
6843
6844@cindex SPU local store size
6845@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6846@item --local-store=lo:hi
6847@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6848the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6849range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6850
c0065db7 6851@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6852@kindex --stack-analysis
6853@item --stack-analysis
6854SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6855unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6856under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6857@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6858@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6859determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6860for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6861for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6862for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6863find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6864and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6865under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6866dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6867is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6868and calls will be given.
6869
c0065db7 6870@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6871@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6872@item --emit-stack-syms
6873This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6874in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6875These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6876functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6877functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6878such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6879The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6880@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6881@end table
6882
6883@ifclear GENERIC
6884@lowersections
6885@end ifclear
6886@end ifset
6887
36f63dca
NC
6888@ifset TICOFF
6889@ifclear GENERIC
6890@raisesections
6891@end ifclear
6892
6893@node TI COFF
6894@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6895@cindex TI COFF versions
6896@kindex --format=@var{version}
6897The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6898TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6899also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6900format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6901header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6902
6903@ifclear GENERIC
6904@lowersections
6905@end ifclear
6906@end ifset
6907
2ca22b03
NC
6908@ifset WIN32
6909@ifclear GENERIC
6910@raisesections
6911@end ifclear
6912
6913@node WIN32
6914@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6915
c0065db7 6916This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6917See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6918command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6919
6920@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6921@cindex import libraries
6922@item import libraries
69da35b5 6923The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6924libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6925regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6926archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6927support for creating such libraries provided with the
6928@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6929
c0065db7
RM
6930@item exporting DLL symbols
6931@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6932The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6933
6934@table @emph
6935@item using auto-export functionality
6936@cindex using auto-export functionality
6937By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6938which is controlled by the following command line options:
6939
0a5d968e
NC
6940@itemize
6941@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6942@item --exclude-symbols
6943@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6944@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6945@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6946@end itemize
6947
09e2aba4
DK
6948When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6949(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6950symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6951often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6952private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6953options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6954exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6955final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6956
6957If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6958command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6959if either of the following are true:
6960
6961@itemize
6962@item A DEF file is used.
6963@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6964@end itemize
dc8465bf 6965
c0065db7
RM
6966@item using a DEF file
6967@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6968Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6969an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6970exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6971name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6972command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6973
6974@example
6975gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6976@end example
6977
0a5d968e
NC
6978Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6979@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6980
dc8465bf
NC
6981Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6982
6983@example
4b5bd4e7 6984LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6985
6986EXPORTS
6987foo
6988bar
6989_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6990another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6991var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6992doo = foo == foo2
6993eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6994@end example
dc8465bf 6995
7fcab871 6996This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6997symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6998alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6999by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7000@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7001@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7002export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7003in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7004symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7005
6b31ad16
DS
7006The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7007name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7008the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7009
b45619c0
NC
7010When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7011library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7012@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7013executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7014
7015With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7016specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7017non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7018
7019If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7020or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7021filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7022
4b5bd4e7
DS
7023The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7024
7025@example
7026EXPORTS
7027 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7028 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7029 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7030@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7031
7032Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7033@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7034@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7035@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7036Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7037@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7038string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7039
7040The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7041
7042@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7043will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7044by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7045linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7046library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7047
7048@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7049The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7050the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7051@code{*_imp__foo}).
7052
7053@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7054well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7055read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7056variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7057the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7058extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7059application will behave unexpectedly.
7060
7061@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7062it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7063symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7064API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7065the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7066
4b5bd4e7
DS
7067See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7068other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7069
7070@cindex creating a DEF file
7071While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7072with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7073
7074@item Using decorations
7075@cindex Using decorations
7076Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7077itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7078declared as:
7079
7080@example
7081__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7082__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7083@end example
7084
7085All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7086any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7087this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7088the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7089
7090Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7091decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7092instead:
7093
7094@example
7095__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7096__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7097@end example
7098
c0065db7
RM
7099This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7100when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7101variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7102code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7103of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7104omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7105@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7106information.
c0065db7 7107@end table
dc8465bf 7108
2ca22b03
NC
7109@cindex automatic data imports
7110@item automatic data imports
7111The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7112by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7113compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7114issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7115code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7116c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7117initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7118decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7119platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7120command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7121The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7122suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7123trigger the feature's use.
7124
c0065db7 7125auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7126additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7127
c0065db7 7128"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7129documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7130
c0065db7
RM
7131The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7132occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7133One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7134below.
7135
7136@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7137For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7138object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7139offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7140field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7141in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7142without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7143The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7144references.
7145
c0065db7
RM
7146The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7147be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7148themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7149runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7150compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7151support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7152run without error on an older system.
7153
c0065db7
RM
7154@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7155enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7156
7157@cindex direct linking to a dll
7158@item direct linking to a dll
7159The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7160including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7161libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7162traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7163libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7164function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7165though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7166storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7167tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7168large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7169
c0065db7 7170Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7171@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7172of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7173perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7174select the dll instead of an import library.
7175
2ca22b03 7176
69da35b5
NC
7177For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7178to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7179
7180@example
45e948fe
NC
7181libxxx.dll.a
7182xxx.dll.a
7183libxxx.a
7184xxx.lib
69da35b5 7185cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7186libxxx.dll
7187xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7188@end example
7189
69da35b5
NC
7190before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7191
c0065db7
RM
7192(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7193where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7194@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7195file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7196@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7197
c0065db7
RM
7198Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7199@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7200was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7201various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7202could coexist on the same machine.
7203
2ca22b03
NC
7204The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7205applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7206libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7207
7208@example
7209bin/
7210 cygxxx.dll
7211lib/
7212 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7213 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7214@end example
7215
c0065db7
RM
7216Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7217done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7218
72191. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7220@example
7221gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7222@end example
2ca22b03 7223
69da35b5
NC
7224However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7225(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7226@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7227not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7228
2ca22b03
NC
72292. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7230directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7231should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7232making the app/dll.
7233
7234@example
7235ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7236@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7237
7238Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7239
7240@example
7241gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7242@end example
69da35b5
NC
7243
7244This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7245perfectly legal
7246
7247@example
7248bin/
7249 cygxxx-5.dll
7250lib/
c0065db7 7251 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7252@end example
7253
dc8465bf 7254Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7255even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7256@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7257
7258Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7259wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7260
72611. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7262work with auto-imported data.
7263
dc8465bf
NC
72642. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7265import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7266symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7267for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7268possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7269
45e948fe
NC
72703. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7271critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7272in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7273stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7274
69da35b5 7275So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7276true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7277a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7278binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7279massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7280requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7281will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7282
c0065db7 7283@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7284@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7285@item adding additional names
7286Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7287A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7288exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7289when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7290import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7291
c0065db7 7292@example
dc8465bf
NC
7293LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7294
7295EXPORTS
c0065db7 7296foo
dc8465bf 7297_foo = foo
c0065db7 7298@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7299
7300The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7301
7302Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7303source code using the "weak" attribute:
7304
c0065db7
RM
7305@example
7306void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7307void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7308@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7309
7310See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7311symbols.
7312
7313@item renaming symbols
7314Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7315kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7316@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7317DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7318created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7319
c0065db7 7320@example
dc8465bf
NC
7321LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7322
7323EXPORTS
7324_foo = foo
c0065db7 7325@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7326
7327The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7328@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7329@end table
dc8465bf 7330
0a5d968e 7331Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7332unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7333If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7334@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7335that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7336@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7337renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7338to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7339the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7340In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7341which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7342
7343@cindex weak externals
7344@item weak externals
7345The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7346weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7347defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7348are three variants of weak externals:
7349@itemize
7350@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7351called lazy externals.
7352@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7353This form is not presently implemented.
7354@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7355implemented.
7356@end itemize
7357As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7358are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7359uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7360
7361@cindex aligned common symbols
7362@item aligned common symbols
7363As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7364desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7365the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7366carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7367by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7368tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7369but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7370warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7371@end table
7372
7373@ifclear GENERIC
7374@lowersections
7375@end ifclear
7376@end ifset
7377
e0001a05
NC
7378@ifset XTENSA
7379@ifclear GENERIC
7380@raisesections
7381@end ifclear
7382
7383@node Xtensa
7384@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7385
7386@cindex Xtensa processors
7387The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7388@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7389specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7390keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7391example, with the command:
7392
7393@smallexample
7394SECTIONS
7395@{
7396 .text : @{
7397 *(.literal .text)
7398 @}
7399@}
7400@end smallexample
7401
7402@noindent
7403@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7404and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7405literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7406interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7407group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7408files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7409and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7410
43cd72b9 7411@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7412@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7413Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7414provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7415is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7416literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7417will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7418location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7419the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7420unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7421@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7422range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7423
7424For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7425to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7426instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7427instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7428instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7429@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7430hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7431By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7432switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7433density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7434instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7435performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7436linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7437a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7438
7439The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7440control the linker:
7441
7442@cindex Xtensa options
7443@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7444@item --size-opt
7445When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7446more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7447no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7448alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7449preserve the correctness of the code.
7450@end table
e0001a05
NC
7451
7452@ifclear GENERIC
7453@lowersections
7454@end ifclear
7455@end ifset
7456
252b5132
RH
7457@ifclear SingleFormat
7458@node BFD
7459@chapter BFD
7460
7461@cindex back end
7462@cindex object file management
7463@cindex object formats available
7464@kindex objdump -i
7465The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7466These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7467object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7468format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7469it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7470associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7471object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7472(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7473list all the formats available for your configuration.
7474
7475@cindex BFD requirements
7476@cindex requirements for BFD
7477As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7478several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7479BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7480formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7481been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7482BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7483may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7484
7485One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7486mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7487useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7488conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7489
7490@menu
7491* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7492@end menu
7493
7494@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7495@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7496@cindex opening object files
7497@include bfdsumm.texi
7498@end ifclear
7499
7500@node Reporting Bugs
7501@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7502@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7503@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7504
ff5dcc92 7505Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7506
7507Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7508it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7509to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7510work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7511@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7512
7513In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7514information that enables us to fix the bug.
7515
7516@menu
7517* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7518* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7519@end menu
7520
7521@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7522@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7523@cindex bug criteria
7524
7525If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7526
7527@itemize @bullet
7528@cindex fatal signal
7529@cindex linker crash
7530@cindex crash of linker
7531@item
7532If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7533@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7534
7535@cindex error on valid input
7536@item
ff5dcc92 7537If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7538
7539@cindex invalid input
7540@item
ff5dcc92 7541If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7542may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7543object files are correct.
7544
7545@item
7546If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7547improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7548@end itemize
7549
7550@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7551@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7552@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7553@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7554
7555A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7556products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7557recommend you contact that organization first.
7558
7559You can find contact information for many support companies and
7560individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7561distribution.
7562
ad22bfe8 7563@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7564Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7565@value{BUGURL}.
7566@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7567
7568The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7569@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7570fact or leave it out, state it!
7571
7572Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7573problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7574assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7575matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7576the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7577location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7578were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7579into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7580specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7581and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7582
7583Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7584the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7585on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7586
7587Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7588bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7589respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7590You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7591
7592To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7593
7594@itemize @bullet
7595@item
ff5dcc92 7596The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7597the @samp{--version} argument.
7598
7599Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7600the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7601
7602@item
ff5dcc92 7603Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7604patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7605
7606@item
7607The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7608version number.
7609
7610@item
ff5dcc92 7611What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7612``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7613
7614@item
7615The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7616observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7617list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7618sufficient.
7619
7620If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7621and then we might not encounter the bug.
7622
7623@item
7624A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7625bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7626provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7627bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7628state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7629requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7630we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7631attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7632
7633If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7634@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7635object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7636@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7637how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7638
7639@item
7640A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7641incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7642
ff5dcc92 7643Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7644will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7645not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7646a chance to make a mistake.
7647
7648Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7649say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7650copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7651C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7652and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7653fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7654you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7655any conclusion from our observations.
7656
7657@item
ff5dcc92 7658If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7659diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7660@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7661If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7662context, not by line number.
7663
7664The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7665sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7666@end itemize
7667
7668Here are some things that are not necessary:
7669
7670@itemize @bullet
7671@item
7672A description of the envelope of the bug.
7673
7674Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7675which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7676changes will not affect it.
7677
7678This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7679will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7680with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7681We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7682
7683Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7684of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7685output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7686less time, and so on.
7687
7688However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7689report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7690
7691@item
7692A patch for the bug.
7693
7694A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7695the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7696a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7697to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7698
ff5dcc92 7699Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7700construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7701through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7702able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7703fixed.
7704
7705And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7706patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7707help us to understand.
7708
7709@item
7710A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7711
7712Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7713things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7714@end itemize
7715
7716@node MRI
7717@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7718@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7719To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7720linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7721alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7722described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7723simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7724@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7725linker commands; these commands are described here.
7726
7727In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7728file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7729features to make use of them.
7730
7731You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7732@samp{-c} command-line option.
7733
7734Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7735command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7736blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7737MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7738issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7739
7740Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7741
7742You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7743lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7744The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7745
7746@table @code
7747@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7748@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7749@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7750Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7751the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7752@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7753your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7754script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7755commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7756input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7757@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7758
7759@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7760@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7761Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7762in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7763
7764@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7765
7766@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7767@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7768Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7769@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7770
7771@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7772@item BASE @var{expression}
7773Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7774absolute addresses) in the output file.
7775
7776@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7777@item CHIP @var{expression}
7778@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7779This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7780
7781@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7782@item END
7783This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7784
7785@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7786@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7787Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7788language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7789
7790@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7791@item
252b5132
RH
7792S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7793
7794@item
7795IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7796
7797@item
7798COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7799@samp{COFF}
7800@end enumerate
7801
7802@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7803@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7804Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7805@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7806
7807The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7808same line, with no change in its effect.
7809
7810@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7811@item LOAD @var{filename}
7812@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7813Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7814same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7815command line.
7816
7817@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7818@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7819@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7820MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7821option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7822
7823@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7824@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7825@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7826Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7827order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7828script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7829sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7830file, in the order specified.
7831
7832@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7833@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7834@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7835@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7836Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7837@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7838
7839@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7840@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7841@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7842@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7843You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7844specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7845If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7846@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7847@end table
7848
793c5807
NC
7849@node GNU Free Documentation License
7850@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7851@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7852
370b66a1
CD
7853@node LD Index
7854@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7855
7856@printindex cp
7857
7858@tex
7859% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7860% meantime:
7861\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7862\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7863\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7864\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7865\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7866\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7867\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7868\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7869\page\colophon
7870% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7871@end tex
7872
252b5132 7873@bye
This page took 1.092933 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.